P. 1
Tutorials Building Mete Nu

Tutorials Building Mete Nu

|Views: 214|Likes:
Published by Aarti Jadli

More info:

Published by: Aarti Jadli on May 17, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

06/26/2013

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • Using the Tutorials
  • Accessing Training Files
  • Understanding the Basics
  • Navigating the User Interface
  • Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture
  • Creating the Project
  • Adding Project Levels
  • Creating a Column Grid
  • Adding Beams
  • Adding Braces
  • Creating a Foundation
  • Changing Structural Member Types
  • Adding Floors
  • Adding a Roof
  • Adding a Curtain Wall
  • Creating an Entrance
  • Creating a Drop Ceiling
  • Creating Multi-Level Stairs
  • Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height
  • Adding Entourage and Site Components
  • Linking a Service Core to the Building Project
  • Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings
  • Creating Views
  • Duplicating Plan Views
  • Creating Elevation and Section Views
  • Creating Callout Views
  • Modifying View Tag Appearance
  • Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views
  • Creating a View Template
  • View Range and Plan Regions
  • Using Filters to Control Visibility
  • Masking Portions of a View
  • Working with Visual Overrides
  • Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project
  • Creating Drawing Sheets
  • Adding Views to Sheets
  • Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View
  • Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet
  • Tagging Objects
  • Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms
  • Tagging Doors and Windows
  • Tagging Other Objects
  • Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
  • Creating a Window Schedule
  • Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
  • Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
  • Creating a Room Schedule
  • Scheduling Rooms from a Program List
  • Creating a Room Color Diagram
  • Creating a Material Takeoff
  • Create a material takeoff
  • Scheduling Shared Parameters
  • Creating a Shared Parameter File
  • Adding Shared Parameters to a Family
  • Placing,Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters
  • Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes
  • Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions
  • Exporting Project Information with ODBC
  • Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access
  • Changing the Base Elevation of a Project
  • Relocating a Project
  • Dimensioning
  • Creating Dimensions
  • Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
  • Controlling Witness Lines
  • Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
  • Creating Text Annotation
  • Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
  • Creating a Detail from a Building Model
  • Detailing the View
  • Adding Detail Lines
  • Adding Text Notes
  • Creating Detail Components
  • Adding Keynotes
  • Creating Line-based Detail Components
  • Modifying a Keynote Database
  • Creating a Drafted Detail
  • Importing a Detail into a Drafting View
  • Creating a Reference Callout
  • Creating a Detail in a Drafting View
  • Using Note Blocks
  • Creating a Note Block
  • Using Drawing Lists
  • Creating a Drawing List
  • Using Legends
  • Creating a Symbol Legend
  • Creating a Component Legend
  • Using Revision Tracking
  • Setting Up a Revision Table
  • Sketching Revision Clouds
  • Tagging Revision Clouds
  • Working with Revisions
  • Importing from Other Applications
  • Importing Image Files
  • Importing Text Documents
  • Importing Spreadsheets
  • Using Dependent Views in Documentation
  • Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views
  • Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views
  • Viewing a Building Model
  • Exploring the Building Model
  • Creating a Perspective View with a Camera
  • Creating a Section View
  • Creating Elevation Views
  • Controlling Fill Pattern Colors
  • Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material
  • Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type
  • Creating a View Plan Region
  • Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan
  • Rendering an Exterior View
  • Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
  • Adding Trees to the Site
  • Creating a Perspective View
  • Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View
  • Rendering an Interior View
  • Adding RPC People
  • Creating the Interior Perspective View
  • Creating a New Render Scene
  • Defining Daylights and Rendering the View
  • Creating and Recording Walkthroughs
  • Creating a Walkthrough
  • Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position
  • Recording the Walkthrough
  • Creating Views for Solar Studies
  • Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View
  • Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View
  • Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View
  • Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations
  • Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice
  • Previewing Solar Study Animation
  • Exporting Solar Studies
  • Exporting the Study as AVI
  • Exporting a Study as PNG
  • Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study
  • Creating an Internal Plan Study
  • Orienting to True North for Solar Studies
  • Orienting to True North
  • Rendering Interior Shadow Views
  • Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique
  • Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique
  • Using Advanced Model Graphics
  • Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet
  • Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique
  • Preparing the Elevation Analytique
  • Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet
  • Adding Section Views to the Analytique
  • Preparing a Section View for the Analytique
  • Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View
  • Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique
  • Working with a Presentation View Template
  • Working in a Callout Analytique
  • Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes
  • Creating Cutaway Isometric Views
  • Creating Cutaway Perspective Views
  • Annotating the Analytique
  • Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
  • Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
  • Creating a Daylight Analysis
  • Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
  • Creating a Building from Mass Faces
  • Using Families and the Family Editor
  • Introduction to Families
  • Introduction to the Family Editor
  • Creating 3D Geometry
  • Process Overview: Creating a Family
  • Defining the Origin of a Family
  • Adding Reference Planes
  • Defining Priorities for Reference Planes
  • Dimensioning Reference Planes
  • Managing Family Parameters and Family Types
  • Lock geometry to reference planes
  • Defining Work Planes
  • Creating Geometry
  • Creating Solid Forms
  • Creating 2D Geometry
  • Loading a Family into a Project
  • Creating a Door Family
  • Drawing the Door Plan View Components
  • Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry
  • Assigning Materials to the Door Components
  • Defining New Door Types
  • Creating a Window Family
  • Specifying the New Window Parameters
  • Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry
  • Assigning Materials to the Window Components
  • Defining New Window Types
  • Creating a Complex Model Family
  • Planning a Complex Model Family
  • Selecting a Family Template
  • Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening
  • Modelling a Complex Wall Opening
  • Creating Window Frame Geometry
  • Defining the Window Sash Parameters
  • Defining Visibility Parameters
  • Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry
  • Creating the Glass Geometry
  • Creating Formulas to Define Width
  • Creating Elevation Lines
  • Assigning Default Materials
  • Creating Material Parameters
  • Creating Nested Families
  • Creating Sill Families
  • Loading Sill Families into the Window Family
  • Creating a Length Parameter
  • Placing the Sill Family
  • Creating a Shared Parameter
  • Testing Nested Families
  • Testing the Family in a Project Environment
  • Creating a Furniture Family
  • Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters
  • Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry
  • Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
  • Defining New Furniture Types
  • Creating a Baluster Family
  • Drawing a Baluster
  • Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
  • Creating Profile Families
  • Drawing a Sweep Profile
  • Drawing a Rail Profile
  • Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
  • Drawing a Reveal Profile
  • Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
  • Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
  • Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
  • Creating a Room Tag
  • Specifying Room Tag Parameters
  • Creating an Annotation Symbol
  • Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol
  • Adding the New North Arrow to a Project
  • Creating a Titleblock Family
  • Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet
  • Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock
  • Adding the Titleblock to a New Project
  • Creating In-Place Families
  • Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family
  • Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family
  • Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates
  • Model Family Templates
  • Annotation Family Templates
  • Titleblock Family Templates
  • Planning a Parametric Component Family
  • Determining Component Needs
  • Selecting the Family Template
  • Creating the Component Skeleton
  • Adding Dimensions and Constraints
  • Creating New Length Parameters
  • Flexing the Component Model
  • Adding Solid Geometry
  • Creating Solid Extrusions
  • Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
  • Creating Additional Solid Geometry
  • Testing the Family in a Project
  • Testing a Family Instance in a Project
  • Working with Nested Subcomponents
  • Adding a Nested Component
  • Creating Formula-controlled Parameters
  • Arraying Nested Subcomponents
  • Reloading a Family into a Project
  • Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
  • Creating and Applying Subcategories
  • Controlling Component Visibility
  • Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
  • Creating Component Types
  • Creating Multiple Component Types
  • Creating Conditional Formulas
  • Flat Curtain System
  • Adding Mullions to the Curtain System
  • Curved Curtain System
  • Adding a Curved Curtain System
  • Adding a Custom Curtain Panel
  • Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel
  • Additional Curtain Systems
  • Sloped Glazings
  • Storefront System
  • Curtain System by Lines
  • Creating Roofs
  • Creating an Extruded Roof
  • Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint
  • Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint
  • Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint
  • Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint
  • Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof
  • Aligning Roof Eaves
  • Creating a Mansard Roof
  • Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits
  • Creating Roof Fascia
  • Creating Gutters
  • Creating Soffits
  • Area Analysis
  • Using Area Analysis Tools
  • Creating Area Schemes and Plans
  • Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans
  • Using Massing Tools
  • Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model
  • Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model
  • Using Mass Family Files in a Project
  • Creating New Mass Family Types
  • Loading and Placing New Mass Families
  • Joining Mass Elements
  • Using Mass Elements with Design Options
  • Mass Elements in Design Options
  • Creating Building Components from Mass Elements
  • Creating Walls by Picking Faces
  • Creating Floors by Picking Faces
  • Creating Roofs by Picking Faces
  • Creating Curtain Systems
  • Editing Elements Created from Massings
  • Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility
  • Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups
  • Creating and Placing a Group
  • Modifying a Group
  • Nesting Groups
  • Working with Detail Groups
  • Creating a Detail Group
  • Using Attached Detail Groups
  • Saving and Loading Groups
  • Using Site Tools
  • Creating a Toposurface
  • Adding Property Lines
  • Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings
  • Creating Topographic Subregions
  • Grading the Toposurface
  • Adding a Building Pad
  • Adding Site Components
  • Tagging Site and Parking Components
  • Creating Parking Space Schedules
  • Adding Structural Walls
  • Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay
  • Sketching Structural Walls
  • Dimensioning and Modifying Walls
  • Adding Structural Columns and Beams
  • Adding Structural Columns
  • Adding Structural Beams and Girders
  • Adding Joists and Purlins
  • Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels
  • Defining New Levels
  • Duplicating the Existing Design
  • Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation
  • Creating a Framing Elevation
  • Adding Structural Braces
  • Overview
  • Using Worksharing in a Project
  • Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals
  • Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets
  • Working Individually with Worksets
  • Using Worksets with Multiple Users
  • Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users
  • Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project
  • Creating the Structural Design Options
  • Creating the Roof System Design Options
  • Managing Design Options
  • Project Phasing
  • Using Phasing
  • Phasing Your Model
  • Using Phase-Specific Room Tags
  • Linking Building Models
  • Linking Building Models from Different Project Files
  • Repositioning Linked Building Models
  • Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility
  • Managing Linked Building Models
  • Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models
  • Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates
  • Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates
  • Working with a Linked Building Model
  • Managing Shared Locations
  • Scheduling Components of Linked Files
  • Modifying System Settings
  • Modifying General System Options
  • Specifying File Locations
  • Specifying Spelling Options
  • Modifying Snap Settings
  • Modifying Project Settings
  • Creating and Applying Materials
  • Creating and Applying Fill Patterns
  • Controlling Object Styles
  • Modifying Line Patterns and Styles
  • Modifying Annotations
  • Specifying Units of Measurement,Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options
  • Modifying Project Browser Organization
  • Creating an Office Template
  • Choosing the Base Template
  • Loading and Modifying Families and Groups
  • Modifying Views and View Templates
  • Modifying Render Scene Settings
  • Modifying Import/Export Settings
  • Setting up Shared and Project Parameters
  • Creating Named Print Settings
  • Create named print settings

Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. click Toolbar. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. To choose commands. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. place the cursor over the menu name. and click. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. notice a door type is specified. Then. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. While working in the drawing area. click the command name to start the command. Edit. TIP For example. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. and View.

the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. For example. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. You use the Type Selector in two ways. Within the drawing area. notice the list of walls that are available. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . if you intend to add a door. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool. 9 In the Type Selector. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. First.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. containing buttons grouped by function. ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. immediately below the Type Selector.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed.

click the tab. select Views (all). reports. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. family category (doors. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. elevations. In the Project Browser. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. 3D). windows). You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. families. walls. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . delete. families. and groups. and rename views. schedules. and group name. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. sheets.

making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. click Wall. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. After you create a browser organization scheme.■ ■ To open a view. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Do not click. 14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. double-click the name. The browser is dockable. click Cancel. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets.

you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. 20 Press TAB. The Status Bar also provides information. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. In the Status Bar. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. click Modify. When you place the cursor over a component. In this case. It highlights when the cursor is over it. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. 18 On the Design Bar. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. The elevation symbol consists of two parts.In the bottom left corner of the window. regarding selected components within a view. in conjunction with Tooltips. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. Navigating the User Interface | 15 ." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar.

Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. Click the Help button. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. You can use this tri-pane. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. click . you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Windows: From any window. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. There are several tools that help you find information. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . For example. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. You can also press SHIFT+F1. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. find a keyword on the Index tab. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. If there is no Help button displayed. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. press F1 to get help on that dialog box.rvt. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. click Training Files. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed.

The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. 9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. 8 Click in the drawing area. and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. 7 Click Zoom To Fit. 6 On the View toolbar. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 . The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. this is referred to as a crossing selection.

12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. and drag the cursor. Similar controls. When drawing or modifying a building model. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. and select the wall. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. referred to as shape handles. expand Views (all). use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. Cnst. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse).10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. on the View toolbar. click Zoom. roll the wheel to zoom the view. On a wheel mouse. click . zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. called drag controls. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. display along the ends. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. These are the drag controls. expand Floor Plans. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. If you do not have a wheel mouse. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. and double-click 2nd Flr. press and hold CTRL. 14 Enter ZR. Without clicking in the dialog. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. Small blue dots. To modify or add snap increments. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. bottoms.

Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . and click again to specify the ending position. click (Move). you want to move the table closer to the wall. require two clicks to complete the command. click to specify the starting position. such as Move and Copy. for example. In this case. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. Some commands. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.15 Click and drag the left control. to lengthen the wall. After selecting the element to be moved. and on the Edit toolbar.

Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 23 On the Undo menu. and drag it on top of the table. as shown. select the second item in the list. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. Move.20 Click next to the lower wall. Select the plant. All changes you make to a project are tracked. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. In this example. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar. click the drop-down menu next to .

End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . 26 To end the command. Press ESC twice. click Modify. such as the Lines command. 27 Close the file without saving your changes.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the Undo command. Some commands. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. click Lines. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. on the Standard toolbar.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. the wall or column will move with it. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. For example. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. it is good practice to test the constraints. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. a curtain wall. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. 25 . Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. a central service core. If the grid moves. As you develop the building design. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid.

subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. from the product library. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . After the beginning exercises. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. In practice. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. you load any required family type that is not in your project. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. such as a door or window.

You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. you design inside the elevation markers. These views are customizable: you can rename them. and elevation views created in the project by the template. To create the project file. West. The project is stored as a single file. The new project opens. levels. In the drawing space in the right pane. Creating the Project | 27 . and settings. 7 If necessary. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. and Elevations (Building Elevation). sheets. you use a template that is provided with the software. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North.rte. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. and click Browse. expand Views (all). locate the Project Browser. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. under Create new. construction. click Training Files. with an RVT extension. schedules. South. reflected ceiling plan views. and families in your project. select Project. East. For this project.Creating the Project In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. and customize the project as necessary. verify the second option is selected. but contains no geometry. expand Floor Plans. notice four elevation markers. and delete them. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. change their properties. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. duplicate them. and residential. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. 5 Click OK. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. you will use the default template. views. Ceiling Plans. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 3 Under Template file. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. In views that display elevation markers. NOTE If you create a project without a template.

enter Revit Retail Building. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. will be accessible from the Project Browser. 14 For File name. and other properties. as well as change their names. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Schedules/Quantities. content and building model reports. 15 For Save as type. such as schedules and legends. heights. Groups. Two level lines. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. and on the General tab. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. created by the template. Sheets (all). 16 Click Save. notice the Legends. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. display in the south elevation. and click Training Files. verify Project Files (*. and duplicate levels. You change the names of the 2 default levels.rvt) is selected. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. delete. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. double-click South. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. You can add. As you design and document your building model. double-click Metric. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 13 In the file window. 10 In the Project Browser. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all).8 Under Floor Plans. After you modify the two default levels. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. the view you see in the drawing area. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. view the Save Reminder interval. you will want to save your work frequently. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. Families.

it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. doors. to each other. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. enter 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. enter 0 mm. enter -1800 mm. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. 4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. Adding Project Levels | 29 . so that when one level moves. When you begin designing. or constrained.You learn how the levels are locked. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. the other levels move and change with it. enter 00 Foundation. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. and double-click South. and press ENTER. and windows within the building model. 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and press ENTER. expand Views (all).

17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. click Level. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. enter 3750 mm. click . 13 On the Options Bar. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. Next. 19 Click OK. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. By default. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. and then move it up. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. click Level. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. This is the Options Bar. not all the tabs are visible. and click OK. click Rename. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. view the Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. and press ESC. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. and for Offset. under Floor Plans. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and move it slightly upward. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. you add another level. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. and click Basics. If it does not. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. using a different option. and enter 02 Level. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. right-click. verify and Make Plan View are selected. As you move the cursor. 16 Enter 3750 mm. 18 In the Project Browser. 14 Click Plan View Types. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. which should display by default. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. When you add the new level.Next. right-click Level 3. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser.

30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. If you create a level by copying it. Adding Project Levels | 31 . or on the Design Bar. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. as shown. Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line.25 Click to place the level line. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 27 Press ESC. and rename the corresponding views. 26 Rename the level 03 Level. click Modify to end the command. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level.

until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. 3 On the Options Bar. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. so that if the roof elevation changes. and you can move them independently. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. Move the cursor up. select . and specify the grid line endpoint. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser. specify a start point for the grid line. In the following exercise. By using the grid to control placement of columns. In a later exercise. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. the column height changes as well. under Floor Plans. If you select a level and click its lock. click Modify. all the levels move. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. On the Design Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. the levels are no longer constrained. click Grid. Notice that by moving the top level. When the grid is complete. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

enter 4500 mm. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. and click to place the line. and click to place the line. Click to place the grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. Next. On the Options Bar. Enter A. enter 7500 mm. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. enter 7500 mm. for Offset. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. for Offset. Creating a Column Grid | 33 . Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. On the Options Bar. and for Offset. and click to place the line. and press ENTER. click . click Grid.

10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar. click Grid. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. and specify the grid line endpoint. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Grid. click Dimension. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 11 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar.8 Press ESC. ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. click and specify an Offset of 0 mm. as shown.

■ ■ Select grid line 1. 24 Press ESC. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown.14 On the Options Bar. 21 Press ESC. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . The pins are hidden. and press ESC. 22 While pressing CTRL. click and drag the blue circular grip up. until it is closer to grid line 5. By pinning these central grid lines. click Dimension. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. 18 On the Design Bar. and select grid line A. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 15 Starting with grid line A. At the left endpoint of the grid line. until it is closer to grid line A. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. select grid lines C and 3. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. and press ESC. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. Two pins display on the grid lines. click . click Modify.

37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 34 On the Options Bar. click Activate Dimensions.■ If necessary. click Structural Column. click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. for From. If it is unlocked. 40 On the Options Bar. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. select 01 Entry Level. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select all of the column grid lines. 31 Press ESC. click Camera. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). 27 In the Type Selector. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. and on the Options Bar. For Place By. Next. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. click Finish. and press ENTER. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 35 Enter 9000 mm. 33 While pressing CTRL. select grid line A. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. lock it. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. click (Grid Intersection). and unlock it. under Floor Plans. 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. 36 On the Standard toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden.

The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. and click to place the target point of the camera.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. Creating a Column Grid | 37 .

45 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. enter To Building. and click OK. 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. The current view. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. under Views (all). Adding Beams In this exercise. In the Rename View dialog. “Adding Beams” on page 38. displays in bold under 3D Views. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. expand 3D Views.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. 44 Save the drawing. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . named 3D View 1 by default.

double-click To Building to view all of the beams. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. The selected grid lines display as red. 10 In the Project Browser. select each grid line. click Finish.When you finish adding beams. The view is currently set to Coarse. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . double-click 01 Entry Level. click Beam. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. click Grid. the icon on the right side of the scale. Adding Beams | 39 . Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 8 While pressing CTRL. 6 In the Type Selector. 4 Click Medium. view the icons on the View Control Bar. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view.

The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. When you created the columns. and click Select All Instances. 12 On the View toolbar. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click. which only extend to the 5th level. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. under Floor Plans. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. select 02 Level. 13 On the Design Bar. select 06 Roof. press and hold SHIFT. 14 Select one of the beams. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

24 Press ESC. double-click To Building. under Constraints. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. under 3D Views. for Top Level. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. select 06 Roof. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. All of the columns display as red. 06 Roof. under Instance Parameters. and click OK. 21 With the column selected. right-click. view the Top Level Constraint parameter. and click Select All Instances. click . You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 20 Click Cancel. 22 On the Options Bar. and if necessary. right-click. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Element Properties. resize the view to see the entire structure. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. Adding Beams | 41 .

The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. and click Coarse. and click Hidden line. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing. under Elevations.View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. 28 Save the drawing. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . area. Click Detail Level. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. but want to display them in less detail. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. “Adding Braces” on page 43. as lines only. double-click South.

under Floor Plans. and press ESC to end the command. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure. double-click 00 Foundation. you create 8 framing elevation views. click Framing Elevation. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. verify Attach to Grid is selected.Adding Braces In this exercise. double-click the elevation marker arrow. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. Adding Braces | 43 . To better add the braces to the structure.

so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. click to specify the start point of the brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 11 Using the same technique. 8 In the Type Selector. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. press ESC. 7 On the Design Bar. but when placed the braces are placed. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. After you add the final brace. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. click Brace. and when the endpoint snap displays.The associated framing elevation view displays. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected.

enter 18000 mm.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. The height of the roof lowers. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. delete it and redraw it. Adding Braces | 45 . and press ENTER.

click twice to restore the original level heights. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. click Activate Dimensions.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. enter 12000 mm. as shown in the 3D view below. and press ENTER. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 21 Select grid line A. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click 00 Foundation. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. enter 10000 mm. under Floor Plans. but this time add them from right to left. 19 In the Project Browser. Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. and on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. and press ENTER. 14 On the Standard toolbar.

lock it. 24 In the Project Browser. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension. and roof height. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. double-click 3D. 31 Save the drawing. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Test connectivity of the columns. under Elevations.23 In the Project Browser. and drag it away from the structure. beams. and if necessary. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 28 On the Standard toolbar. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Project Browser. double-click South. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. 29 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. double-click 00 Foundation. Creating a Foundation | 47 . grid size. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure.

Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. under Extents. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm. and how to load specific families into a project. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. and expand Structural Foundation. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. under View Depth. The pile cap has been added in the view. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. select Unlimited. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. click Edit. expand Families. In the View Range dialog. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. double-click 00 Foundation. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag it to the drawing area. and click View Properties. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. Click OK twice. The foundation pile cap now displays. A warning displays. under Floor Plans. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes).rfa. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. for View Range. click Training Files.Before you can add the pile caps. 9 Close the warning dialog. for Level. In the Element Properties dialog. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. and press ESC. After you load the pile cap family. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1.

double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. 13 In the Project Browser. When the final pile cap is placed. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. press ESC. under 3D Views.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. Creating a Foundation | 49 . and click Create Similar.

right-click. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. and braces that you used to create the building structure. click Training Files. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. and brace families into the project. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 3 In the Type Selector. click Modify.5CHS. View the round hollow columns in the building model. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . you change the types of the columns. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. beams.14 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. You load new column. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. All of the columns in the building model display as red. and click Select All Instances. 4 On the Design Bar. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12. beam. double-click 3D. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under 3D Views. 2 Select one of the columns.

click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 19 On the Design Bar. and changing its size parameter. the braces as well as the beams change. click . Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . for Type. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203. select the braces in the elevation one by one. 17 While pressing CTRL. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Selector. click Brace. select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. enter 75 mm. click Duplicate. 9 In the Type Selector. under Dimensions. 13 In the Name dialog. and click OK twice.2x101. This not the size that you want to use. 16 On the Design Bar. right-click. click Modify. 10 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. The brace type changes. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. click Modify. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. under Elevations (Interior Elevation).6x15. double-click Elevation 1-a. click . View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. enter 75 mm. In the following steps. 18 In the Type Selector. 15 In the Project Browser. you change the brace type. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. for d.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. and click OK. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm.9. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. but it is the only size of its type currently available. and click Select All Instances.

Adding Floors In this exercise. You are now in the sketch editor. you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. stairs. In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. To create floors. Some other Revit Architecture elements. and elements in the current view display as gray.rvt. click Lines. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. “Adding Floors” on page 52.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as roofs. and railings are also created from sketches. under Floor Plans. click Floor. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. ■ On the Sketch tab. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.

■ ■ On the Options Bar. select the top floor line. past the first vertical grid line. as you resize it in the next steps. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. Do not lock the dimensions. and then the 1st horizontal grid line. Using a crossing window. At the top left corner of the grid. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Move the cursor to the left. click Dimension. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. click . Do not lock the dimension. If the grid changes size. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Adding Floors | 53 . The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. Leave this dimension unlocked.

click Modify. They display on the floor sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. Enter 300 mm. and then press ESC. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. Select and lock the dimensions. and click the temporary dimension value. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. Next. and change their values to 300 mm. on the Design Bar. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. At the top left corner of the grid.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click . Move the cursor to the right dimension. press ENTER. using a different sketching technique. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. click Quit Sketch. this is how you would do it. select the top floor line. and on the Options Bar. 8 Select the floor. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry.

On the Sketch tab.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. and lock the dimensions. The 02 Level floor displays. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. 14 On the Design Bar. and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. and for Offset. double-click 02 Level. under Floor Plans. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. Select the three remaining floor lines. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. click Lines. Adding Floors | 55 . click Floor. enter 1500mm. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and press ESC. click .

and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. Click the locks to constrain the floors. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Align . 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor.Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. under Floor Plans. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. click Lines. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Floor. click . 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. double-click 03 Level. and a lock icon displays. 18 On the Options Bar.

double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Edit. click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. double-click 00 Foundation. 35 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 31 In the Project Browser. and unlock it. double-click {3D}. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. and lock the edges. under Floor Plans. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. and click Shading with Edges. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. click Model Graphics Style. 40 Select grid line A. under Views ➤ 3D Views. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. 38 In the Project Browser. select 05 Roof Garden. 37 On the View Control Bar. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. under Floor Plans. and click Activate Dimensions.24 On the Design Bar. Adding Floors | 57 . The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 32 Select the floor. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. Alternatively. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click 01 Entry Level. View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. and enter 4500 mm. and click OK.

42 In the Project Browser. 44 In the Project Browser. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building. “Adding a Roof ” on page 58. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. 43 On the Standard toolbar. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm. under 3D Views. Adding a Roof In this exercise. double-click {3D} to view the grid. double-click 00 Foundation.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. click to place the roof line. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. You sketch the footprint. or the perimeter. click Training Files. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and press ENTER. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. Click . and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope.To create the roof. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope. click Lines. ■ ■ For Offset.rvt. When a green dashed line displays. 3 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 1800 mm. Adding a Roof | 59 . double-click 06 Roof. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line. of the roof in a plan view.

Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. enter 0 mm. and when the green dashed line displays. click to place the roof line. click (Trim/Extend). The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line. 10 Press ESC.6 Select grid line 5. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. ■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and lock it. and lock it. For Offset. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. move the cursor slightly below the grid line.

for Slope Angle. click .00. and click OK.12 Optionally. click Finish Roof. Adding a Roof | 61 . View the roof 19 On the View toolbar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. under Dimensions. 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. double-click 06 Roof. 13 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. click . click . 17 Select the roof. enter 4.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. 3 In the Type Selector. Under Construction. click Wall.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. under Floor Plans. enter Retail Storefront. The type is saved in the project. for Spacing. select Curtain Wall: Storefront. for Type. for Join Condition. enter 2100 mm. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Name dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. When you duplicate a type. click 01 Entry Level. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . for Spacing. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. you add a curtain wall. and click OK. click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. the curtain wall resizes with it. so if you resize the grid. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. click Duplicate. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type.rvt. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK twice. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. enter 1050 mm.

Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. select 01 Entry Level. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 . 13 On the Design Bar.■ ■ ■ For Level. For Height. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. and move it slightly toward the building interior. click (Trim/Extend). 10 When a green dashed line displays. select 05 Roof Garden. If you want to hide them. For Offset. so they remain in the view. enter 600 mm. dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. and trim each curtain wall segment. the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. and lock the dimensions. If the grid moves. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. you can delete the dimension. These dimensions are not in a sketch. click Dimension.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click To Building. under 3D Views. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Click Model Graphics Style. and click Hidden Line.View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. and click Shading with Edges.

and click Medium. 2 On the View Control Bar. Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. All the elements in the list are selected. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Under Visibility. and double-click South. 6 Under Visibility. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. under Views (all). clear one element to clear all the elements. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall.rvt. 4 On the Model Categories tab. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. To better work with the curtain wall panels. under the element list. click Training Files.Creating an Entrance In this exercise. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Detail Level. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click None. click All. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. Creating an Entrance | 65 .

15 Zoom to the drawing extents.Do not select Columns. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 9 On the Design Bar. 12 With the panels selected. select System Panel: Solid. 7 Click OK. select Architectural Elevation. in the Type Selector. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. as these usually represent internal pilasters. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. click Modify. and click OK. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. press and hold CTRL. 10 Select 1 panel. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area.

If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. double-click To Building.16 On the View Control Bar. in this case an architectural elevation. under 3D Views. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. Creating an Entrance | 67 . double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Project Browser.

select another mullion to the right. click Curtain Grid.20 In the Project Browser. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. and click to select it. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. double-click South. 24 On the Options Bar. click Add or Remove Segments. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown.

select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. 30 On the Design Bar. and unpin it. 34 On the View toolbar. select One Segment. 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. click . 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. 32 In the Type Selector. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. and view the new entrance. Creating an Entrance | 69 . click Modify.27 On the Options Bar. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections).

38 Press DELETE. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. press TAB until it is selected. select it. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 39 Using the same process. and unpin it. 3rd.36 Zoom in to the first panel. remove the mullions from the 2nd. and 4th panels.

and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. 1 In the Project Browser. and click View Properties. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building.rvt. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. for Underlay.40 Optionally. under Floor Plans. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Training Files. under Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 5 Click OK. open the North elevation. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click 01 Entry Level. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. select 02 Level. 3 Right-click in the view. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 .

The cursor changes to a pencil. 8 Select the callout. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. and specify a point to complete the callout. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . which indicates you must draw the callout.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. select the grip closest to the callout head. click Callout.

11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section. 13 Select the section line. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. and click Rename. 14 Press ESC. and click Flip Section. right-click. under Floor Plans. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 10 In the Rename View dialog.9 In the Project Browser. 12 Draw a section line. Move the cursor horizontally to the left. and click OK. 16 Select the section box. enter Display Area. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. and specify a point past grid line D.

and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. select Finish Face: Exterior. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. click Ceiling. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. double-click 01 Entry Level. double-click 01 Entry Level. 19 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. expand Sections (Building Section).17 In the Project Browser. right-click Section 1. and lock the dimension. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and lock the dimension. 24 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. under Ceiling Plans. For Loc Line. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). click Wall. 27 On the Options Bar. Click . 32 In the Type Selector. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. and click Rename. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . 30 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. 25 Press ESC. for Prefer. Lock both alignments. enter Section Display Area. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 21 In the Type Selector. click (Align). select Wall faces. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. double-click Section Display Area. The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. and click to select the walls. 37 On the Design Bar.■ Click Click . 36 Press ESC. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . click . . 41 On the Options Bar. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 39 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch.

and click OK. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall. for Base Offset. and click OK. 44 Select the ceiling. and click . enter 2700 mm. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. click Attach. press TAB until you select the wall chain. under Constraints. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. 47 In the Project Browser. To position the grid. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select a grid line. under Constraints.42 In the Element Properties dialog. under Ceiling Plans. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. and specify a distance. click Modify. and click to select the walls. on the Tools toolbar. enter 2700 mm. for Top/Base. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry Level. 43 On the Design Bar. click Move. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. for Height Offset From Level. Select the 02 Level Floor.

55 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. click (Rotate). Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . 54 In the Type Properties dialog. click Cancel. click Edit. 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 57 On the Options Bar.View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. view the ceiling structure. for Structure. click Cancel. under Construction. and click . 53 Click OK. for Type.

enter 45. 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.59 Click. and press ENTER. 60 Press ESC. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

under 3D Views. 64 On the View Control Bar. 65 Optionally. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 . you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Shadows Off. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. click Shadows On. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 63 On the View Control Bar. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. and then copying it to the 05 Level. After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. double-click To Building.

Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. and 3.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. C. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2. Move the cursor vertically. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. You will create the stair in the area between these columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. click Ref Plane. under Floor Plans. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B. 3 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click to specify the start point of the reference plane.

Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 . 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to create first stair flight.■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2. click Stairs. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane.

9 On the Design Bar. beyond the end of the stair.225mm Masonry. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Type Selector.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. click Align. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. click Wall. including its handrails. select Basic Wall: Generic . and click to select it. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. and specify a point. The complete stair displays. and select the 2nd reference plane. Move the cursor down. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. and lock the alignment. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select Finish Face: Interior. Click . 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. 16 Using the same technique. ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair.

for Prefer. and press DELETE. a warning displays. select Wall faces. Select the interior face of the wall. and press ENTER. and press DELETE. click . 21 Select the stair. and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 19 Select the dimension. select both reference planes. 22 On the Standard toolbar. The stair and walls move to the left. 23 While pressing CTRL. Select the bottom of the stair. click Dimension. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. and specify a point away from the wall. Because the dimension is constrained. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . Select the wall. Lock the dimension. Click Modify. enter 1200 mm.17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. select the dimension value. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

28 On the Design Bar. and move the cursor to spin the building model. Click OK. click Door. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. and click . 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 35 Press SHIFT. 31 Select the stair. . select 05 Roof Garden. clear Tag on Placement. and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 25 In the Type Selector. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. 33 On the View toolbar. click Modify. For Top Constraint. for Base Constraint. but if you view the top level of the building. Under Constraints. click . 29 While pressing CTRL. verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. TIP To flip the door swing. Click OK. select 00 Foundation. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. click 34 On the View toolbar. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. select all 4 walls.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. press and hold the left mouse button. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Multistory Top Level. 26 On the Options Bar.

38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and lock the alignments. 37 Zoom in to the stairs. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. 45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click . Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 .Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. click Align. 41 On the Tools toolbar. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. . ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and lock the alignment. 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.

55 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 52 In the Project Browser. Under Constraints. double-click 01 Entry Level. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. under Floor Plans. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. ■ For Top Constraint. click . By offsetting the base. click . 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. 53 Select the shaft. .49 In the Select Levels dialog. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . for Base Offset. click 56 On the View toolbar. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. and click OK. View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar. enter 300 mm. and spin the building so you can see the roof. click 51 On the View toolbar. .

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. click Training Files. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 . Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise.58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level.rvt.

2 Right-click in the view. select Core Face: Interior. and click OK. 5 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Generic . and click View Properties. click Wall. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the wall. Select the dimension value. under Graphics. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. for Underlay. click Modify. under Floor Plans. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. click Dimension. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Loc Line. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar.225mm Masonry. and press ENTER. Enter 1050 mm. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3. select 06 Roof. double-click 05 Roof Garden.

click Lines. 23 Press ESC. 19 Press ESC. and click to place a line. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. move the cursor up 4500 mm. The South elevation displays. 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . 17 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. and click to place a line. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. 16 In the Go To View dialog. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up 6000 mm. and on the Options Bar. click Lines.11 On the Tools toolbar. 20 On the Design Bar. double-click Elevation: South. and then select the right face of the wall. click Edit Profile. click (Align). click Modify. 15 Select the wall. and click to place a line. 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left.

click (Trim/Extend). Select the top right portion of the circle. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to place it. 29 On the Options Bar. 26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. click . and click (Circle). 32 Click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. and select it. Press ESC. Select the short right profile line.24 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 30 Using the Quadrant snap. Select the top horizontal profile line. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. 31 Move the cursor to the left. click Lines. Select the top right portion of the circle. 27 Press ESC. snap to the top of the circle. click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar.

click Finish Sketch. 47 Click Cancel. 40 On the Design Bar. you maintained the relationship to the roof level. select the short horizontal line on the right. click . and press DELETE. click Modify. 44 On the Design Bar. 43 In the Warning dialog. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. and press DELETE. click Modify. click Finish Sketch. 42 On the Design Bar.34 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. By adding extra height to the wall. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. 38 On the Design Bar. You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. 35 On the Options Bar. click . 39 In the Error dialog. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. instead of lengthening the existing edge. unlock it. 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. click the Close button. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . click Lines. 37 On the Design Bar. 45 On the Options Bar. note that for Top Constraint. and select the wall. click Modify. under Constraints. click Continue. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays.

click to restore the original height of the roof. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden. under 3D Views. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and how to place and adjust them in project views. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. double-click 3D. You learn how to load these components into the project.49 On the Standard toolbar.

click Component. TIP After you place the 1st planter. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 05 Roof Garden. between grid lines C and D. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter.rvt. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 . click Training Files. 3 In the Type Selector.

and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. select M_Tree .5 On the Basics tab. 15 In the Name dialog. double-click {3D}. 11 In the Project Browser. and press ESC. and in the Type Selector. 6 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 12 Select 1 of the trees.5. under 3D Views. click . click . click Duplicate. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. double-click 05 Roof Garden. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. select Tree . enter Cornus Florida 1. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. under Other. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 Click Apply.5 Meters.5 Meters. for Plant Height. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. click Component. click Edit/New. and then click OK twice. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 18 While pressing CTRL. select the 2 remaining trees. 10 View the roof. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. enter 1500 mm. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

and click to sketch a line. 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. 27 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 26 Using the same method. and click to sketch a line. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . and click to place the line. click Lines. enter 0 mm. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. click Floor. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. enter 2400 mm. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. ■ ■ For Offset.21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . 29 Select the right vertical floor line.

and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. and click to finish the line. click (Trim/Extend). and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. The completed sidewalk displays. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 38 On the Design Bar. click . and click to finish the line. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. clear Chain.30 On the Options Bar. move the cursor up 900 mm. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 31 On the Options Bar. 35 Select the line that you just drew. click Finish Sketch.

Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. enter -250 mm. 53 In the Type Selector. under Constraints. click Component. click . 42 In the Name dialog. as it is currently a floor element. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. create a new type for the sidewalk element. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. and click to place her on the sidewalk. for Height Offset from Level. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 45 Click OK. 43 Click OK twice. 48 In the Type Selector. for Type. In plan view. select M_RPC Male: Alex. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. The circle is divided in half by a line. select Rotate after placement.Next. RPC people are represented by a circle. enter Sidewalk. near Column E5. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . and on the Options Bar. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 39 Select the sidewalk. 52 Move the cursor toward the column. click Duplicate. 49 On the Options Bar.

56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. 64 Select Cathy.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. click Camera. under Constraints. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). 61 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter -300 mm. When you select a host for a component. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. under Elevations. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. and click . Next. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. click the car. 55 In the Type Selector. 57 Press ESC. double-click West. select M_RPC Beetle. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. for Offset. click Pick Host. and on the Options Bar. 60 In the Element Properties dialog.

67 Click the sidewalk. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Pick Host. and on the Options Bar. and replace them with a service core. 66 Select Alex. If the sidewalk changes height. 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. double-click To Building. 69 Using the same method. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 . under 3D Views. 71 Proceed to the next exercise.65 Click the sidewalk.

After the service core is linked to your project. including the stairs. you delete the entire stairwell. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell.rvt. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. . 3 Select the entire stairwell. so it will cut through the floors of the building. click . and shaft opening. and press DELETE. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings. under Floor Plans. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. press SHIFT.The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. you must cut another shaft opening around it. 4 On the View toolbar. and spin the building. click 5 On the View toolbar. double-click 06 Roof.

double-click 01 Entry Level. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 . 11 Click Open. 10 At the bottom of the dialog. and then select the top horizontal core wall. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place. select m_RRB_link. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. The building service core displays in your drawing. 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D.rvt. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 9 In the Metric folder. click Training Files. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models. click (Align). Select Cursor at center.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser. Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. under Floor Plans. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line.

For Top Constraint. 17 On the Options Bar. select Chain. Under Constraints. for Base Offset. enter 300 mm. 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 16 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Finish Sketch. 18 On the Options Bar. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click 24 On the View toolbar. click Lines. click . View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. click . select Up to level: 06 Roof.Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

you add glass railings around the floor edges. and open Metric\m_Conference. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. in the Project Browser. expand Renderings. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building. click Training Files.rvt. 3 In the new project. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . and double-click Lounge Perspective. After you modify it. press SHIFT. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. where it is hosted within a railing family. click Training Files. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The rendering displays. This is the railing that you want to add to your model.

The floor sketch displays. and select Glass. 12 Select the floor. and on the Options Bar. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard.rvt. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. double-click 02 Level. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. and Parapet. and click to split the floor. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Modify. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays. under Floor Plans. 5 Expand Railing. 15 On the Design Bar. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building. Handrail only. and expand Railings. expand Families. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. press and hold CTRL. click (Split). click OK. click Edit. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B.

and click the lock to lock the alignment. and click to draw another line.18 On the Design Bar. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . 24 On the Tools toolbar. 26 Select grid line D. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. click . 27 On the Tools toolbar. and click to place it. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. and lock the alignment. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line. 25 Select grid line B. click (Align). 23 Complete the sketch as shown. and click the lock to lock the alignment. click Lines. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor.

click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. enter 100 mm. click Dimension. click Dimension.29 On the Design Bar. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click Railing. For Offset. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Railing Properties. and click OK. 37 On the Design Bar. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 31 In the Revit dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. select Glass. 30 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click .rvt project. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Lock the dimensions. for Type.

View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line.39 Click Finish Sketch. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 . 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. click Camera. Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. You can view the railing that you just added.

■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view. 43 Close all project drawings. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. balconies. 109 . a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section. lofty ceilings. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. exterior fire stairs. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. and a roof garden.

NOTE For training purposes. 110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.

including plan. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 . section. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. elevation.

You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create views from a building model. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views.Creating Views In this lesson. You learn how to create new views from existing views. how to create section and elevation views.

6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 8 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. 9 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. and click OK. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser.

13 In the Project Browser. Next. 14 On the View Control Bar.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click 1: 1000. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. double-click Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. 12 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 11 Under Floor Plans. enter Vicinity Plan.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 . you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise.16 Right-click. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and click Hide in view ➤ Category.rvt.

click Elevation. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. under Floor Plans. select1:100.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select Elevation: Building Elevation. 4 On the Options Bar. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 . under Elevations (Building Elevation). 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click OK. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename View dialog. enter South East. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. double-click South East.

select Section: Building Section. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. under Views (all). click Section. Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. ■ Move the cursor down. for Scale. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 In the Type Selector. select 1:100. expand Floor Plans. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 1.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser.

19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. click Split Segment. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. and click to place it. Click the midpoint of the section line.

View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. and double-click Section 1. 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 24 Select gridline F. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. expand Sections (Building Section). click Modify. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the View Control Bar.

Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Creating Callout Views | 121 . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.25 On the Design Bar. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. click Modify. To create each view.rvt.

double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. select 1:50. select Floor Plan.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Callout. 3 In the Type Selector. for Scale. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. and select the callout boundary. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. and specify a point to complete the callout.

right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. enter Enlarged Stair Plan.■ Select the middle grip. Creating Callout Views | 123 . and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. click Modify. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 9 In the Rename View dialog. 7 On the Design Bar.

select Detail View: Detail. click Callout. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. 13 In the Type Selector. for Scale. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. under Sections (Building Sections). select 1:50. 14 On the Options Bar.

18 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Callout Views | 125 . Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. under Detail Views (Details). enter Roof Overhang Detail. 17 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details). and click OK.

You change the appearance of the section mark head. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. the elevation markers. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.

and can be applied to the section line. click the Annotation Objects tab. click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project. and click OK. and click OK twice. enter Section Head – Custom.Custom. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays.Filled. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. scroll to Section Line. 12 For Section Tag. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Section Tail – Filled. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. select the section line. clear any others. and click OK. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. select Custom-Section Head. 15 Under Category. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. . 14 In the Object Styles dialog. open Metric\Families\Annotations. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. for Section Head. and click Open. select Section Head . and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Section Tail . click Load into Project. 8 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 4 On the Design Bar. 10 On the floor plan. click Duplicate.rvt. double-click Level 1.rfa. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.

and click Open.rfa. and on the Options Bar. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. select Custom-Callout Head. . clear all others. for Elevation Tag. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 On the Design Bar. On the floor plan. 17 Under Category. notice the square elevation markers that display. The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. and click OK.5mm Square. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. scroll to Section Marks. select the current project. On the floor plan. For Dimensions ➤ Width. 22 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. and select 3. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. 27 Click OK twice. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags.5 mm. click Edit/New.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. Click OK. click Training Files. 19 Click OK.5mm Square. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. For Line Weight. and click OK. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter 12. and select 2. select 12. select Square. enter 12. open Metric\Families\Annotations. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. click Load into Project. select 3. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

. click Duplicate. 34 In the Name dialog. 36 In the drawing. 49 Click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. select Dash. 46 Under Category. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. for Callout Tag. For Corner Radius. 45 For Line Pattern. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click Edit/New. 38 In the Type Properties dialog.33 In the Type Properties dialog. select . Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. Click OK. enter . and select 4. 40 Press ESC. and on the Options Bar. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Click OK twice. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and select 7. expand Callout Boundary. click the Annotation Objects tab. 43 Under Category. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. enter 6 mm. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. scroll down to Callout Boundary. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . select the callout.

masking regions. filters. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. view regions. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. and visual overrides. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. and apply it to multiple elevation views. To accomplish this. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. The crop region displays as red. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a View Template In this exercise. under Elevations. and double-click East. You learn to create view templates. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt.

under Visibility. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. 6 On the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. right-click East. 13 Under Visibility. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. under Elevations. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Zoom to Fit. and click Properties.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. clear Entourage. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 5 On the View Toolbar. under Extents. 8 Click OK. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

and click Create View Template From View. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. elevation markers.14 Click OK. 15 On the View Control bar. under Elevations. and click OK. 21 In the Select View Template dialog. 19 In the Project Browser. 132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click North. click Apply. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. and section lines are now hidden in the view. right-click North. under Elevations. and click Apply View Template. 17 In the New View Template dialog. 20 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Callouts. right-click East. click OK. 16 In the Project Browser. 18 In the View Templates dialog. levels. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. grids. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation.

You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. double-click Penthouse. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. select Penthouse. right-click.rvt. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 . as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Edit. select Level Below (Level 4).22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. under Extents. for Level. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. for View Range. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view.rvt. select Level Below (Level 4). and click Properties. for Bottom.

6 In the Project Browser. select Level 4. select Level 4. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. double-click Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. for Level. Click OK twice. right-click. for Bottom. for View Range. select Roof Plan.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Properties. under Extents. Under View Depth. click Edit. 7 In the Element Properties dialog.

click Region Property. 16 On the Design Bar. for Bottom. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. for View Range. 17 On the Design Bar. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. click Plan Region. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. click Lines. select Unlimited. click Modify. Move you cursor diagonally. select Unlimited. under Extents. for Level. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . In the left corner of the building.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Edit. 13 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. Under View Depth. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below.

and double-click Level 1. under Categories. click (New).18 Click File menu ➤ Save. After you apply the filter. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. select Fire Rating. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. expand Floor Plans. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.rvt. select Walls. 7 In the Filters dialog. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . in this case. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click the Filters tab. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. the fire rating of the walls. enter Rated Walls. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. under Views (all). and click OK. click Edit/New. under Filters.

19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 17 Using the same method. for Rated Walls. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. and click OK. select the red color. click Add. 9 Click OK. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. click No Override. 11 Select Rated Walls. and click OK. 10 On the Filter tab. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 14 In the Color dialog. Enter Hr. click OK. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. under Basic colors. click Override under Patterns. 16 Click OK. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. 12 On the Filter tab. select Solid Fill. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. under Projection/Surface. Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. for Pattern. To accomplish this.■ ■ Select contains. click Remove. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. for Color. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 Select Copy of Level 1. 4 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. as shown. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 3 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 5 On the View menu. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .rvt. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. click Show Crop Region.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

9 On the View Control Bar. click (Rectangle). 8 Select the crop region. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region.7 On the View menu. 11 In the Type Selector. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. Masking Portions of a View | 139 . 12 On the Options Bar. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Masking Region. select Invisible lines.

14 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.Level 1. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . right-click Unit 18 Plan . Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click Finish Sketch. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.

Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. for Pattern. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click the current scale. and click Override. and click 1: 50. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . for Color. right-click. under Pattern Overrides.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. under Visibility. 7 Under Cut. 4 On the View Control Bar. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. click No Override. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. select Walls. and click OK. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. right-click. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click in the Patterns field. select Solid fill. 11 Click OK twice. and click Rename. click black. and click OK.

click Modify. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. clear Floors. and click OK. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. clear Grids. 16 Under Visibility. 12 On the Design Bar.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Visibility. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.

Working with Visual Overrides | 143 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown.18 Right-click.

25 Click OK twice. By using the previous method to make the selection. select the sofa. select Dash. click No Override. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. right-click. 21 Under Projection/Surface. for Color. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 29 In the Color dialog. 23 In the Color dialog. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 24 In the Line Graphics dialog.20 Right-click. click Override. under Lines. click a purple color. click Projection Lines. and click OK. select a bright green color. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. 28 For Color. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. for Pattern. and click OK twice. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. click By Category Override.

click . Working with Visual Overrides | 145 . 33 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps.30 On the Design Bar. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. click . right-click. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. The hidden crop region is also revealed.

146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .34 Click File menu ➤ Save. how to add views to the sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.Creating Sheets. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. and click OK. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. right-click. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. select A0 metric. click Training Files.rvt. click Sheet. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. and click View.

A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and select the title block. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. on the Options Bar. under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties).Unnamed. enter Site Plan. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. For Sheet Name. 5 When the title block highlights. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . enter A101. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . expand Sheets (all). For Sheet Number. click Modify. 3 In the Project Browser.

MA 12345 12 Click OK. under Other. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. For Project Status. For Client Name. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. for Project Address. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. The new project information displays in the titleblock. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. enter 2007-1. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter Freighthouse Flats. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. enter J. For Project Number.■ Click OK. click Edit. click Modify. 14 Click OK. enter For Approval. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 2007. enter 15 May. 7 On the Design Bar. Smith. For Project Name.

Sections A108 . and click Save. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. select A0 metric. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. click Modify. and click Rename.rvt. and click OK. right-click. under Sheets (all). right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. and click OK. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. you add views to these sheets.Stairs In the following exercise. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and drag it to the sheet.Elevations A107 .Floor Plan. and click to place the view. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 .rvt. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. for Name. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 17 In the Project Browser. select Level 1.Elevations A106 . double-click A102 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. enter Floor Plan.Elevations A105 . 4 On the Design Bar. select the new sheet name. Adding Views to Sheets | 149 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.Layout Plan A104 .

double-click A104 .The red border around the view no longer displays. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 8 On the Design Bar.Elevations. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. align it with the East elevation. and click to place it. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all). and click to place it. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. 6 In the Project Browser.

11 Under Detail Views (Detail). . under Sheets (all). Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. and click OK. Adding Views to Sheets | 151 . click Modify. and click to place it. double-click A107 . drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). 16 Select title bar. 12 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. select 1:5. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog.Sections. for View Scale. and click to place it. and on the Options Bar.

double-click Level 1. double-click A108 .NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. 152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. under Sheets (all).Stairs. and press TAB until it highlights. 18 Under Floor Plans. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. move the cursor over it. 19 On the Design Bar. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it. under Floor Plans. zoom in to the grip.

you must first activate the view on the sheet. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. under Sheets (all).22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. double-click A107 . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser.Sections. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 .rvt. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. and then make changes and deactivate the view. In order to do this. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 7 In the Project Browser. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. double-click North. right-click. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. and click Deactivate View. 5 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER.2 Select the building section view. and click Activate View. 6 Right-click. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. click Modify. enter 16700 mm. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

and click OK. select the new sheet name. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. right-click. click Camera. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.rvt. After you create the sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. You modify the view to hide the view title. select A0 metric. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. The camera view displays.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. and click Properties. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. enter T. under Floor Plans. enter Title Sheet. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. double-click Level 1. Click OK. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. 7 Place the camera as shown.

click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. select Far Clip Active. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . double-click T . 14 Under 3D Views. 12 On the View Control Bar. under Sheets (all). 11 On the View Control Bar. for Eye Elevation. enter 18000 mm. Under Extents. enter100000 mm. Under Camera. For Far Clip Offset. For Target Elevation. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. enter 1500 mm. 13 In the Project Browser. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ .8 On the Options Bar. Click OK.Title Sheet. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.

click Modify. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. click Size. for Height. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. for Show title. under Graphics.15 With the view selected. enter Viewport/no title mark. Under Model Crop Size. click Edit/New. and click OK. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. select Scale (locked proportions). 19 Select the view on the sheet. click Duplicate. 25 On the Design Bar. . on the Options Bar. Click Apply. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . and on the Options Bar. enter 635 mm. click Modify. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. 22 In the Name dialog. select No. and then click OK. 24 Click OK twice. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. and close the exercise file. 158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as doors and windows. You also learn to create different types of schedules.Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. such as room and window schedules. 159 .

click Room Separation. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active.Level 1. right-click in the Design Bar. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. expand Floor Plans. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.Tagging Objects In this lesson.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Room and Area. Because of the open style floor plan. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 . and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area.4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. move the cursor to the right.

11 In the Tags dialog. The room tag number displays in blue. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. click OK. click Modify. and the rectangle contains the room tag. indicating that it can be edited. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Training Files.rfa.7 On the Design Bar. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and select the room tag. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Load. 15 On the Design Bar. click Room. click Modify. and click to place the room and tag. verify that Tag on placement is selected.

19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . Click to place the new room and tag. and press ENTER. enter Entry. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 18 On the Design Bar. click Room.16 Zoom in on the tag number. click it. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. and press ENTER. 17 Click the room text label. enter U18-1. click Modify.

Sequential letters are also supported. 20 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Modify. 21 Click the room text label. enter Kitchen. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. Dining. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and edit the tags as shown (Toilet.

clear Room Separation.Level 1. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Floor Plans. but they need to be tagged. click Room Tag. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.Level 2. in the Project Browser. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 . 28 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Model Categories tab. 26 On the Design Bar. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms.rvt. and moving clockwise.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. The rooms are already placed. expand Lines. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. double-click Unit 18 Plan .rvt. you learn how to place door and window tags. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).

enter U18-1. and press ENTER. under Identify Data. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. enter U18-2. click Modify. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. clear Leader. for Mark. 3 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Properties).

under Category. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 .Level 2. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. and click OK. double-click Unit 18 Plan . select Door Tags.

rfa.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. and double-click Level 1. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . expand Floor Plans. and click OK. select Window. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Tags dialog. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. click Load. click Training Files. click Tag All Not Tagged. 21 Click OK.

rvt. 4 Select a dining room chair. Zoom flyout. double-click Level 2. click Yes to load a tag.rfa. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. 27 On the Design Bar. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.Level 1. and click OK. 25 Under Floor Plans. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. you learn how to tag furniture objects. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . click Tag All Not Tagged. 26 On the View toolbar. select Leader. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. 28 Select Window Tags. and modify the tag placement and display. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. expand Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing. 5 At the confirmation prompt. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 3 On the Options Bar.

170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .8 Select the furniture in the living room. 13 Optionally. and drag it up to form an angled leader. 12 Click the elbow control. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. and on the Options Bar. 9 Click Modify. and drag it above the chair tag. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). clear Leader. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 11 Select the tag for the table. 14 Click Modify.

16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. Tagging Other Objects | 171 . click Tag All Not Tagged. click Modify. and on the Design Bar. Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. under Floor Plans. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. and click OK. Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. click (Filter Selection). double-click Unit 18 Plan . 18 On the Design Bar.Level 2. select M_Furniture tag : Standard.

21 In the Filter dialog. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. and click OK. you learn to add schedules. click Check None. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. 22 In the Type Selector. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. select Furniture Tags. and click Modify.

you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. Finally. click Training Files. Next. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 .You begin by creating a window instance schedule. a schedule that lists every window in the building. in which windows are listed by window type. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. that is.

The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 For Name. click the Fields tab. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. enter Building Window Schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. and click View. and click OK. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. select Comments and click Add. 6 Under Available fields. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 7 Using the same method. and double-click Level 1.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Category. select Windows. 9 Click OK.

16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. expand Schedules/Quantities. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. However. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. click Show. under Other. click Close. 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. select Type Mark. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . you are prompted to open one that does. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. for Sort by. NOTE By clicking Show. If no open view shows the selected element.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. for Sorting/Grouping. click Edit. and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. this can be a time-consuming process. and click View Properties. in large building models with many views. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. right-click the schedule.

and press ENTER. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule.The window schedule is displayed. clear Itemize every instance. under Other. for Sorting/Grouping. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View Properties. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. 22 Click OK twice. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . sorted by type mark. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. click Edit. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. The window type schedule is displayed. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. under Floor Plans. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. In this case. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. Under Parameter Data. select Type. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click Add to create the new parameter. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. jamb. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. unlike shared parameters. For Discipline. 5 Click OK. enter Head Detail. and sill conditions for a window can be found.rvt. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . expand Schedules/Quantities. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. select Construction. and double-click Building Window Schedule. for Name. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. For Group parameter under.rvt. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. you cannot use them to tag objects. click OK. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category.

178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click Building Window Schedule. and click Properties. click Edit. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. select Head Detail. select the following fields. enter Window Details. 12 Click OK twice. for Fields. so that they are listed before Comments. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. and while pressing the left mouse button. 14 On the Options Bar. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. under Other. TIP To select all 3 headers. click in the Head Detail header. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. and Sill Detail. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. click Group.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. Jamb Detail. under Available fields.

and for Sill Detail. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. enter Unit 18 . Verify the Phase is Phase 1. for Head Detail. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . For example. 4 Click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You then hide the column used for the filter. Select contains in the second field. Enter U18 in the third field. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. enter 2/A107. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. Under Name. and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. Verify Schedule building components is selected.Level 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. click the Fields tab. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. select the following fields. enter 1/A107. click Schedule/Quantities. 6 Under Available fields. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Doors.Door Schedule. enter 3/A107. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . expand Floor Plans. for Jamb Detail. under Type Mark A. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

13 In the Project Browser. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. and click OK. click Modify. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click A102 . expand Sheets (all). select Hidden Field. 9 Click the Formatting tab. select Family and Type.Unit 18. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. 11 Under Field formatting. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. and drag it to the sheet.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.Door Schedule. but is not included as a column in the schedule. click Unit 18 . select Mark. 10 Under Fields. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 To the right of Header text. under Available fields. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. 5 Using the same method. and click Add. double-click Level 1. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. and click View. right-click in the Design Bar. and click OK. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Schedule/Quantities. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Category. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . select Number. under Floor Plans. 8 Click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. 19 On the Design Bar. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. click Modify.rvt.

enter Corridor. For 102. For 103. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. 11 Using the same method. The room Number is U17-9. select Corridor. and press ENTER. click New. for room 101. select Storage. for Name. 101-106. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. and press ENTER. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. For 105. 10 Edit the number to be 101. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. add 5 more rooms. and press ENTER. enter Building Entry. next to Rows. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. For 104. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. enter Storage.

select 9. under Projection/Surface. you add room separation lines. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. and click OK. Under Custom colors. and press ENTER. double-click Level 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. click the Lines field. click Override. enter Stair. under Floor Plans. and modify room names.rvt. In the Lines field. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser.■ For 106. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. place rooms from a program list. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. For Room Separation. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click the bright green swatch. For Weight. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 . click the Color field. click Room Separation. expand Lines. In the Line Graphics dialog.

Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. click Room. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. draw the horizontal line. click Modify. First.7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. 8 On the Design Bar.

for Room. enter 2400 mm. for Room. select 102 Storage.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 101 Building Entry. 13 For Offset. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right). Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 . 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar.

18 In the Project Browser. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. under Floor Plans. and zoom in to the Corridor. double-click Level 1. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. double-click Room Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 16 On the Design Bar. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. click Modify. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas.

select Base Finish. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Units. 22 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. under Available fields. 30 For Key Name. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 . and click Add. double-click Room Schedule. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. and for all 3 finishes. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. 26 Select Schedule keys. under Category. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. click Modify. clear Room Bounding. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click (Properties). select Rooms. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and Wall Finish. Floor Finish. enter As Selected.19 While pressing CTRL. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. while pressing CTRL. click Schedule/Quantities. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). 23 In the Project Browser. click New to add a new row.

under Schedules/Quantities. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. for Fields. 36 In the Project Browser. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. click Room Style. 37 Under U17-8. 32 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 42 In the Filter dialog. for Room Style. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. for Available fields. right-click Room Schedule. 35 Click OK twice. double-click Level 1. Zoom flyout. and click OK. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Rooms. click Zoom To Fit. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. 39 On the View toolbar. click Check None. click (Filter Selection). and click Add. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. under Floor Plans.31 Using the same method. click Edit. 41 On the Options Bar. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Units. double-click Room Schedule.

For rooms 102 and 105. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. double-click Room Schedule. for Room Style. and apply it to the Level 1 view. click the Color Scheme field. under Identity Data. and 106. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). under Floor Plans. 5 For Title. select Room Type. under Schedules/Quantities.43 On the Options Bar. click (Duplicate). 103. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . select Room Style. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. 8 Click OK. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 9 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and double-click Level 1.rvt. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 104. expand Floor Plans. select Public. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. click OK. select Service. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. select Units. and click OK. 45 In the Project Browser. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. click (Properties). enter Room Type. enter Room Type. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click Properties. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Level 1. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. for Name. at the warning prompt. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. 6 For Color. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme.

13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 22 In the Color dialog. click Modify. 18 On the Options Bar. click the value in the Color column. and click OK twice. click Edit. and clear Room Separation. 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog. select the color legend. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Display Color Fill in. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). click Color Scheme Legend. 16 On the Design Bar. clear Visible. click Edit Color Scheme. expand Lines. and click OK. select blue. select Foreground.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. under Custom color.

for Swatch Width. (Properties).23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. click Edit/New. under Graphics. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 Click OK. 28 Under Title Text. and click OK twice. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 . Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. on the Options Bar. enter 5 mm. for Size. enter 25 mm.

under 3D Views. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise.29 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Modify. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.

select Material: Description. 9 Using the same method. click Modify. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. 12 Click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. select Roofs. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . select Material: Area.3 While pressing CTRL. under Category. For Then by. Clear Itemize every instance. under Available fields.Insulation on Plywood Deck . select Family and Type. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. Select Grand totals. 4 In the Type Selector. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.EPDM. select Calculate totals. and click OK. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. 11 Click the Formatting tab. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. click Family and Type. Under Field formatting. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add. select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist .

and click OK twice. 24 In the Project Browser. and under Fields. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). under Available fields. 21 Click the Formatting tab.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. click Edit. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated. click Estimated Cost.40 50. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. 17 Click Calculated Value. for Name. enter Estimated Cost. under Other. 19 For Formula. and click Properties. 20 Click OK. and click Add. click Material: Cost.35 The Estimated cost is calculated.80 5. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 23 In the Material Takeoff. for the Material: Cost field. and click Properties. for Fields. 22 For Field formatting. select Calculate totals.

Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. click Estimated Cost.rvt. and reporting the shared parameters. select 2 decimal places. For Rounding. click Training Files. click Edit. In this lesson. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. These shared parameters can be added to any family. adding the shared parameters to a family. 28 Click OK 3 times. you create a shared parameter file. For Units. creating a generic tag to tag the family. either within family components or within the project template. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. 27 Click Field Format. for Formatting. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default.25 In the Element Properties dialog. You draw a travel path line. you create an exiting plan for the building. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 . regardless of category. tag the line. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. under Fields. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and are defined and stored in an external file. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. and schedule the total distance of each path. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. select Fixed. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. ensuring consistency across families and projects. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

under Groups.1 In the Project Browser. 7 Under Parameters. under Floor Plans. for Name. for File name. enter Path ID. select Length. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. for Name. 9 Under Parameters. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Create. enter Travel Distance. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. and click OK. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. enter Exiting.rvt. and click Save. and click OK. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. click New.txt. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. for Name. click Training Files. 11 Click OK. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. click New. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. click New.rvt. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. for Type of Parameter. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters.

click Add. and click OK. in the Load into Projects dialog. 12 Click Apply. select Constraints. under Dimensions. 11 In the Family Types dialog. following the equals symbol (=). Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . 4 In the Family Types dialog. under Parameters. and click OK.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. 14 If necessary. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.rvt. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click Family Types. otherwise the family loads into the current project. and click Select. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 7 For Group parameter under. for Travel Distance Formula. select Shared parameter. and click OK. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. Click Training Files. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. click Load into Projects. 13 On the Design Bar. 8 Select Instance. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. 9 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. enter Length. If you have multiple projects open.rfa. under Parameters. 3 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and select Instance. click Add. group it under Dimensions. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line.

rft. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Modify. under Parameters. click Label. click Training Files.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK 3 times. select Travel Distance. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 26 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Open. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. 19 On the Design Bar. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click Label. click Add. click Select. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 17 Select Generic Tag. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog.rft.

Tagging. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 . 28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window.rfa. After the lines are tagged. 30 In the Save As dialog. 31 On the Design Bar. and move it down.27 In the drawing window. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans.rvt is selected. Placing. and press DELETE.Level 1. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. double-click Exiting Plan . you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and click Save. enter M_Travel Distance Tag. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. Placing. click Load into Projects. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. select Path ID.rvt. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. for File Name.Tagging.

200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and click in the center of the corridor. click Component. select Chain. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the right.2 Zoom in to the corridor. above the exterior door as shown. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown.

under Constraints. and click outside of the building. 12 On the Design Bar. for Path ID. click Component. click Tag ➤ By Category. through the door. Placing.Tagging. enter 1-1. clear Leader. 13 While pressing CTRL. double click Exiting Plan . under Floor Plans. click Modify. and click OK. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 10 On the Options Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.7 Move the cursor down. verify that Chain is selected. and click (Properties).Level 2. 17 On the Options Bar. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

19 Move the cursor up through the door. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. click Component. click Modify. and click above the door to the stair.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. move the cursor to the left. and click. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor near the right corner. 21 On the Design Bar. 22 Click at the center starting point. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

under Constraints. and click OK. Placing. 28 While pressing CTRL. 27 On the Design Bar.23 Move the cursor down. and click in the stair. 24 On the Design Bar. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. enter 2-1. under Category. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 .Tagging. for Path ID. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. 33 For Name. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. enter Level 1 Exit Distance. and click OK. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category. (Properties). click Modify.

right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. click Schedule/Quantities. 36 For Filter by. and click OK. click Edit.rvt. enter 2-. enter 1-. and under Field formatting. and click Properties. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 41 Under Fields. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. 45 In the Rename View dialog. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. select Path ID and Travel Distance. 35 Click the Filter tab. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 42 Click OK. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Path ID. 47 In the Element Properties dialog.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click View. select Travel Distance. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 44 In the Project Browser. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Schedules/Quantities. under Available fields. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. select contains. select Path ID. in the third field. right-click the Design Bar. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. and click Add. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 46 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. click Training Files. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and in the third field. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. and click OK twice. 38 For Sort by. in the first field. under Other. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 40 Click the Formatting tab. for Filter. in the second field. select Calculate Totals. while pressing CTRL. for Filter by. 43 In the Project Browser. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. and click Rename.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. and click OK twice. and click the browse button.Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 . select the following fields. expand C . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 .152 mm. and click OK. click the Value field. click C1010145 .Partitions .Fixed Partitions. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. right-click Generic . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. click the Fields tab. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog.2 In the New Schedules dialog. and click Properties. under Categories. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select Walls. for Assembly Code. 4 Under Available fields.Interiors\C10 .

7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click the File Data Source tab. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 10 Close the exercise file. under Database. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. select a location for the database file. 9 Under Directories. click OK. 6 Click Finish. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. enter Revit_Project. click OK in the dialog. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. 10 When the confirmation displays. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. and click OK to create the database. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. under Database Name. Additionally. 8 In the New Database dialog. click Create. 1 On the File menu. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. and click Next. and click Next. 3 Click New. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb).rvt. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. click Training Files.9 In the schedule. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .mdb for Database Name.

which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. 13 Close the exercise file. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. For example. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. in addition to the Id column. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. so that each table of elements includes an Id column.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 209 .

or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. click Training Files. Relocating a Project | 211 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.rvt.Relocating a Project In this exercise.

for Elevation Base. enter8 mm Head . the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. The levels in the project are not shared. enter 10000 mm. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Shared.Shared Elevation. 10 On the View menu. you specify the new location of the project. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. and click OK. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). By selecting the Level 1 line. and double-click South. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. The south elevation is displayed. 3 On the Options Bar. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. Under Constraints. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. 8 Select the Level 1 line. In the Name dialog. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. and press ENTER. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. click Edit/New. By entering 10000 mm in this step.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. 6 Click OK twice. However. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. expand Views (all). and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. click (Properties). If you did that now. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration. Relocating a Project | 213 .Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. click Modify. under Elevations. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector.Shared Elevation. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. double-click North. select Level : 8 mm Head . as well as other views of the building model.

15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. 214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select Levels 2-4. and the Roof Plan level. select Level : 8 mm Head . the Penthouse level.Shared Elevation. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. In the Type Selector.

although you must turn on their visibility to view them. click File menu ➤ Save As. multi-segmented. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. and double-click Level 1. Dimensioning | 215 . Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created.16 If you want to save your changes. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In this case. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. radial. expand Floor Plans. and angular dimensions.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. permanent dimensions are created automatically. expand Views (all). You place linear. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. “Dimensioning” on page 215. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In Revit Architecture. Dimensioning In this lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson.

and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view. select it. and are created by selecting individual reference points. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . snap to wall centerlines. select it. By default. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. dimensions are aligned.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view.

5 Move the cursor above the view. 7 On the Design Bar. and click to place the dimension. Creating Dimensions | 217 . 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. click Dimension. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. click Modify. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. The lock displays as locked.

15 Move the cursor to the right. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. 12 13 On the Options Bar. above the plan view of the building. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. 11 Using the same method. select Wall Faces. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. and select its left exterior face. select the right endpoint of the planter. 17 Move the cursor up. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. select the right side of the curtain wall. but below the first dimension that you placed. for Prefer. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. and select it.

22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). For Prefer. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. click Dimension.19 On the Basics tab. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. Creating Dimensions | 219 . 26 Select the radial dimension. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 21 On the Design Bar. and specify a point to place the dimension. select Wall faces. click Modify. and select it. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall. click Modify. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .. click (Properties). 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. click Dimension. For Prefer. click Modify. for Suffix. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. on the Options Bar. 29 In the Element Properties dialog.28 With the dimension still selected. enter Typ. verify Wall faces is selected. 34 Select the horizontal line. 30 On the Basics tab.

click Modify. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. 37 On the Basics tab. and click to place the dimension. you select only the wall. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. 38 Proceed to the next exercise. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. When you dimension the wall. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 .This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

and double-click Level 3. For Pick. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. select Openings. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Wall centerlines. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Walls. click Dimension. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References. expand Floor Plans. and select Widths. expand Views (all). 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click Options. Click OK. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. 7 On the Basics tab. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. click Modify. 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise. and click to place the automatic dimension string.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. When you place dimensions. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. However. expand Floor Plans. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. For example. in some cases. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. for a multi-segmented dimension. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 . where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223.

verify Wall centerlines is selected. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. click Dimension. move the cursor down. select the right edge of the planter. select Individual References. and click to place the dimension. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. and select it. 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. 7 Using the same method. For Pick.

and select it. and specify a point to place the dimension. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 .8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down. 10 Using the same method. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted.

and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click Dimension. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and click to place the dimension. and when the wall centerline highlights. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. and drag the dimension down the wall. 15 Moving the cursor to the right. 13 On the Options Bar. for Prefer. select it. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed.

19 Release SHIFT. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. 20 Release SHIFT. After you create the new family type. and using the same methods. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. click Modify. create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 . 22 On the Basics tab.

dimension tick mark. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. enter 3. for Tick Mark. 2 Click (Properties). Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics.2 mm. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. enter Office Standard. text font. select CityBlueprint. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 In the Name dialog. and click OK. select Arrow 30 Degree. for Text Size. click Duplicate.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. and select the lower dimension. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Text. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. For Text Font.

click Modify. ■ Click OK twice. 9 In the Type Selector. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. 10 On the Basics tab. and select the bottom dimension. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . select another font. 7 On the Basics tab. click Modify.

You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. create a new angular dimension type. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 12 Proceed to the next lesson. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. and how to add leaders to the text notes.11 Using the same method. select the angular dimension on the planter.

Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. zoom to planter near grid line 5. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . for Leader. but below the upper dimension string. click (None). 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click and drag to create a text box. click Text. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan.

7 Select the text box. If so. and click OK.5 In the text box. 10 In the Name dialog box. enter EXISTING BUILDING. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. and click OK. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. and click OK. enter 6 mm. for Text Size. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Under Text. click Duplicate. and click . under Graphics. select Arc Leaders. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. click Edit/New.

15 On the Design Bar. click Text. A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). and enter Planting Bed. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . click Modify.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

and click OK. for Leader Arrowhead. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. 20 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Under Text. select Arrow 30 Degree. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Graphics. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. select CityBlueprint. Click OK twice. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. for Text font. for New. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. In the Rename dialog. 21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. enter Standard Notes. Click Rename. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .

27 On the Options Bar. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. click (Arc). over the Planting Bed text. select Text: Standard Notes. 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. click to place the text box. click Text. 26 In the Type Selector. for Leader.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar.

31 Click in the text box. 32 If you want to save your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and enter 457 mm Conc. Wall. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

plywood. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. like a standard door header condition. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. These components display at the required scale. and metal studs. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. 237 .

which means that all detail components. you detail the view of the roof edge. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. as well as detail lines. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. They are also view specific. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . you trace over the building model geometry. region objects. Detailing the View In this exercise. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In order to detail from the building model. In the callout view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. After you add components. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and insulation objects. You load detail components. add detail components. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click OK. 17 In the drawing area. The roof overhang detail displays. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Name dialog. double-click the detail callout head. 16 Click OK twice. 5 In the alert dialog. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. 8 Delete the component. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Detailing the View | 239 .rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. click . click Training Files. select Corrugated Metal. click Duplicate. enter 406. Exact location is not important. and click OK. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 10 On the Options Bar. select As underlay.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Detail Component. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. for Pattern ➤ Detail. click Edit/New. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 For Spacing.5mm. click Repeating Detail. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 In the drawing area. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open.

and press DELETE. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. and on the Edit toolbar. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. click (Move). click Modify. 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. ■ Click Modify. 23 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click Load. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point.

click Detail Component. 26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. 32 To properly orient the component. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. click Training Files. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. Detailing the View | 241 . 25 In the Type Selector. 34 In the Type Selector. press SPACEBAR 3 times. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. Because you still have several components to load. and click Open.rvt. 31 In the Type Selector.rfa. click OK. and click Open. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. and place it in the detail view as shown. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. you load them as a group from a single file. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section.

select Chain.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. click the Flip instance arrows. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 36 On the Options Bar. click Insulation. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 38 Click Modify. 39 Select the horizontal segment. and click Modify. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

click Detail Component. enter 140mm. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 46 In the Type Selector. select to near side. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar.41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Detailing the View | 243 . For Offset. and on the Edit toolbar. 43 Click Modify. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. ■ Click Modify. click (Move). as shown. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point.

3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. select Thin Lines. Like detail components. 4 Click Modify. you add lines to your detail. click Detail Lines. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. meaning they display only in this view.rvt.48 In the Type Selector. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. as shown. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. 2 In the Type Selector. and lock the component. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. 52 Click Modify. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. they are view specific. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 53 Proceed to the next exercise.

For Offset. 10 On the Design Bar. For Offset. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). as shown. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. click Detail Lines. click Detail Lines. as shown. 11 In the Type Selector.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. enter 10mm. 7 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines | 245 . enter 10mm. select Thin Lines. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. and press ENTER.

select Thin Lines.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. select Chain. as shown. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. click (Draw). draw the detail lines as shown. 18 In the Type Selector. and draw the detail lines as shown. and clear Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component.

What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. and click Properties. and press ENTER. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 22 In the Project Browser. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. Adding Detail Lines | 247 .20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. For Offset. right-click. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. select Do not display. enter 10mm. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 24 On the View Control Bar. 26 In the Type Selector. select the Penthouse level line. When you turn the display model off. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Lines. select Vapor Barrier.

34 Proceed to the next exercise. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. click Detail Component. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 30 In the Type Selector. 32 Click Modify.29 On the Design Bar. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you add text notes to complete the detail. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248. select M_Break Line. click Text. 248 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. and click OK. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. and click (Properties). click (Arc) to create an arced leader. Click again to specify the location of the text box. enter Typ. Enter the text. click Dimension. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click Modify. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow.2 On the Options Bar. for Text ➤ Suffix. Adding Text Notes | 249 . 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. 7 Select the dimension line.

Keynotes.rvt. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. 7 Click Modify. (Filter Selection). 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing . under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select all the coping linework. and click Rename. click Roof Overhang Detail. 3 In the Rename View dialog. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. pressing TAB. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. select a text note. and click OK. enter Roof Overhang Detail . Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. and click OK. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. and selecting the chain. click 6 In the Filter dialog. “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. right-click. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. right-click. while pressing CTRL. on the Options Bar. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. right-click. click Select All Instances. and save the exercise file. and press DELETE. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.

click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. click Detail Component. and the component can be placed in the detail. navigate to your preferred location. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. click . clear Detail Items. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. for File name. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected.Keynotes view is not the open view. enter Roof Edge.rft. double-click it in the Project Browser. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . in the Type Selector. and click Save. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 16 Click Modify. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 25 In the Filter dialog. select the coping.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 22 Click Modify. 18 In the Save As dialog. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. While pressing SHIFT. click Training Files. 14 Click Modify. and click OK. The original linework remains selected. select Medium Lines. 23 Using a window. 21 To place the component. click Load into Projects. Creating Detail Components | 251 . and click Open. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 24 On the Options Bar. 15 Use a window to select all linework.

In the Keynotes dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. Click to place the leader arm. click Detail Component. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. click Training Files. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. 31 Using the same method used previously. click Training Files.B5. click Load. 27 On the Design Bar. delete the underlying linework. and click Open.rvt. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag.rfa. 30 In the drawing area. “Adding Keynotes” on page 252. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.rfa. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.26 Press DELETE. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 63mm Rigid Insulation. and click OK. 2 In the alert dialog. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Keynote ➤ Element. 28 On the Options Bar. you place keynotes on objects. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

click Edit/New. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties). navigate to 07645. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. For the 50 x 150. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300.G1. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. 11 Click OK 3 times. FasciaProfile_1. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.I1. use keynote 09250. use keynote 06110. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.F1. For the metal coping.D11. For the 50 x 200. select the metal fascia with drip edge. 12 On the Design Bar. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 06110. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. use keynote 07645. use keynote 06160.D1.D11. use keynote 06110. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Roof Edge4.C1. 6 Click Modify. Adding Keynotes | 253 . Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. 19mm Plywood. use keynote 06160.F1. click in the Value column.

22mm Corrugated Steel . click Load into Projects. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 In the drawing area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.20 Ga. 4 In the Type Selector. select the left end point of the reference line. 18 Save the file. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. click Training Files. and click Save. and click Open. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Lines. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based.14 On the Design Bar. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 8 In the Save As dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.A8. select Medium Lines.rft. using keynote 07460. select Corrugated Metal.rvt. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. for File name. You do this in order to keynote the component. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254. and click Modify. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 6 Lock the line. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and select the right end point. 17 Keynote the component. 9 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Selector.

click Duplicate. click Duplicate. 24 While pressing CTRL. click Edit/New. 27 On the Design Bar. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. invisible. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. click the end points at the top of the roof. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. 28 In the Type Selector. click in the Value column. click Training Files. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click . click Detail Component. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. click Detail Component. 25 Next. and hidden) used in the view. 34 In the Name dialog. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 31 Select the component. 22 On the Options Bar.11 Press DELETE.A1. and click Open. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 37 Click OK 3 times. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. enter EPDM Membrane. click Edit/New. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . You add the components to the project and keynote them. 13 In the Type Selector. 30 Click Modify. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the drawing area. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. 19 In the Name dialog. click Detail Component. select m_Light Line Detail Component. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. 16 Select the component. select Medium Line Detail Component. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 15 Click Modify. click Load. and click OK. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 20 Click OK 3 times. and click (Properties). 18 In the Type Properties dialog.

G1. 52 In the Type Selector. 46 Click Modify. and click . 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. select Chain. 48 Using the same method used previously. and click the lower end at the break line. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. and assign it keynote 07260. 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing .A5. and click . 49 With the component selected. 53 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Design Bar. (Move). against the 3/4" plywood. 42 Using the same method used previously. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 41 Select the component just added. on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. and assign it keynote 06110.38 On the Design Bar. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. 40 Click Modify. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. name the component Air Barrier. 47 Select the component. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. click Detail Component. click Detail Component.

and assign it keynote 07260. Air Barrier. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.55 Click Modify. and Vapor Barrier. 61 In the drawing area. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. leaving the detail component lines. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 .A4. 58 Using the method used previously. 60 On the Design Bar. and click . add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. name the component Vapor Barrier. 50 x 200 Framing. click Keynote ➤ Element. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines.

69 Using the method used previously. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.A9. Enter 07460.rvt. select Invisible Lines. 71 Save the file. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load into Projects. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. click File menu ➤ Save. in the Type Selector. select the component. click Detail Component.. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258. and assign it keynote 07210. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. name the component Batt Insul. 70 In the drawing area. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 68 Select the component. and press ENTER. and click . You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing. and press TAB. and press TAB. and close the text editor. add a keynote for the component. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. The database file opens in a text editor. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. 67 In the drawing area.txt.A1. 3 In the text editor. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. Enter 07463.rfa. 72 Proceed to the next exercise.A4.rfa. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 63 In the drawing area.

under Path Type.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. In the Type Selector. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar.A1. navigate to 07463. click to place the leader. and click OK. After you create a drafting view. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. These details do not update with changes to the building model. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click Open. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 13 Click Modify.txt. select all the keynotes. you learn how to create a drafted detail. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . and click to place the note. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. under Keynote Table. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. 14 Save the file. and click OK. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 9 In the drawing area. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. Each keynote displays as a simple number. click Browse. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. 11 Click Modify. select Absolute. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.

The detail is imported as an import symbol. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . For Layer/Level Colors. Click Open.rvt. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. and click Rename. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. right-click Drafting 1. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Training Files. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. enter EPDM Metal Coping.dwg. select Black and white. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. select 1 : 5. select Center-to-center. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 In the Rename View dialog. for Scale. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. select Reference other view. and click OK. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 6 In the Project Browser. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.rvt. click Callout.

for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. right-click EPDM Metal Coping. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Reference Callout | 261 . and click OK. 12 Click OK twice. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. delete the existing value. Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify.No Reference. 10 In the Rename dialog. for New. click Rename. and double-click the callout. 5 Click Modify.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. enter Detail . click Edit/New. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the callout. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Properties.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view./Det. enter Header @ Sliding Door. 3 On the View Control Bar./Sect. double-click A105 .rvt. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. The callout is updated with the sheet information. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. verify that the scale is 1 : 5. for Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product.No Reference). 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. 18 Save the file. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.Elev. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . and click OK.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click Modify. Board. 16 Select the left edge of the region. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. 19 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. for Name. 14 Click OK 3 times. click Duplicate. 11 In the Name dialog. select the width dimension. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. select Wide Lines. select Gypsum-Plaster. and click OK. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. 18 While pressing CTRL. Draw a rectangle as shown. and enter 20. click Detail Component. click Region Properties. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. enter Gyp. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector.5mm. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click . . select the left and bottom edges of the region.

and click above the top of the region as the end point. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 24 Select the mirrored region. click Finish Sketch. (Draw).20 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor up. click 22 On the Options Bar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150.

enter Wood . 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. click Region Properties. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. and select the right edge of the wood region. click Filled Region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. select Wood . 37 On the Design Bar.Finish. click Edit/New. Draw a rectangle as shown. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. .Finish. and click OK. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. verify that the thickness is 19mm. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. in the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch.25 Click Modify. 33 Click OK 3 times. click (Align). 30 In the Name dialog. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click . click Duplicate. for Name. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 31 In the Type Properties dialog.

46 On the Tools toolbar. 39 In the Type Selector. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick).5mm. click . 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. 42 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. sketch the new region as shown. enter 6mm. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. 40 On the Options Bar. click (Align).38 On the Design Bar. select Medium Lines. click Filled Region. and press ENTER. click Finish Sketch. For Offset.

Move the cursor down 305mm. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 48 Click Modify. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and press ENTER. enter 10mm. and click to select the point. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. Move the cursor left 25mm.47 Click the reference plane. click Filled Region. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Select Chain. and click to select the point. enter 0. Move the cursor right 25mm. and click to select the point. For Offset. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw). and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. ■ ■ ■ For Offset. and press ENTER. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . click Finish Sketch. click (Trim/Extend). 56 On the Design Bar. and select the bottom horizontal line. 54 On the Tools toolbar. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar.

click Training Files. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. enter 3mm. and click Open. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Detail Component. click Load. 65 On the Options Bar. enter 76. 61 Click Modify. 62 Select the left detail line. and right edges of the door panel region.2mm. For Offset. and press ENTER. top. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 60 Select the left. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. select Medium Lines. select the height dimension. 58 In the Type Selector.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa.

71 On the Options Bar. click Load. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . 70 On the Design Bar. use the images as a guide. click Training Files. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. 68 Click Modify. select Wide Lines. 69 Select the bolt. click Detail Lines. and click Open. 74 Select the expansion bolt.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 76 In the Type Selector.rfa. click Detail Component.

81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. click Detail Lines. (Mirror). 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click . click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 79 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. 80 On the Options Bar.78 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. and on the Edit toolbar. 85 On the Options Bar. click . 82 Select the rectangle. 84 On the Design Bar.

87 Click Modify. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 . as shown. 89 On the Design Bar. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. select Medium Lines. click Detail Lines. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. 90 In the Type Selector. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left.

click . and press ENTER. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. 95 On the Design Bar. select the length dimension. click (Mirror). 97 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . enter 3mm. and click to place the arc as shown. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection.92 Select the line. 94 Select the mirrored line on the right. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. and on the Edit toolbar.

105 In the drawing area. 106 Click to place the dimension. select M_Break Line. and click Modify. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Dimension. click Detail Component. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar.99 Click Modify. 102 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 . and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 101 On the Design Bar. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 103 Add two break lines as shown.

115 Select the note. 114 Enter Gyp. 110 Select the dimension line. click to create an arced leader. 108 In the Type Selector. 112 In the Options Bar. and click to place the text. and on the Options Bar. and click Modify. Board. and click Modify. drag the text for the smaller dimension. Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. click Text.107 On the Design Bar. 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 113 In the drawing area. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. select the gypsum board region on the left.5mm Arial. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Dimension. using the Drag Text grip.

117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. click Modify to end the command. 118 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 . 119 Save the file.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 .

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. click Training Files. and double-click East.Using Note Blocks In this lesson. 7 On the Design Bar. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .rfa.rvt. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Finishing-Sheets. click Symbol. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door.Hexagon. for Number of Leaders. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. click Modify. click Training Files. 5 On the Options Bar.

and click above the tag to place a copy. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click (Properties). under Identity Data. click (Copy). enter Seal existing doors and insulate. for Text.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. Creating a Note Block | 279 . on the Options Bar. 12 On the Edit toolbar. 13 Select the tag.

enter B. as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. 19 On the toolbar. 20 Select the tag on the left. click (Mirror). enter Repair existing door surround. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. click (Properties). on the Options Bar. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and click. 17 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. 15 For Text. 16 For Tag. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. clear Copy. and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building.14 With the copy selected.

continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Create. Repair as required. Clean existing concrete loading dock. select Tag. Select Text. Remove all existing windows. Clean exterior brick wall. Creating a Note Block | 281 . Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. using the table as a reference. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 22 Optionally. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. under Available fields. and click Add.21 On the Design Bar. enter Exterior Construction Notes. Tuckpoint as required. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. and click Add. for Sort by. Repair existing door surround. and moving counter-clockwise. for Note block name. Clean cut and repair wall as required. Saw cut existing brick wall. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. format. and click OK. click Modify. select Tag.

select Exterior Construction Notes.rvt. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. verify Arial in the first field. 28 In the Project Browser. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. On the Appearance tab. 29 In the Project Browser. enter Description. For Header text. and double-click A103 . enter Mark. and click Save.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 27 In the column header (text). select Center. and select Bold. enter 6 mm in the second field. expand Sheets (all). expand Schedules/Quantities. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 32 Zoom in to see the note block. and for Alignment. 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. and drag it to the sheet.Elevations. for Heading. 26 Click OK. 31 On the Design Bar.

under Sheets (all).Title Sheet. and click Add. double-click T . Select Sheet Name. select does not equal. The drawing list displays.Title Sheet. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and in the third field. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. in the second field. under Available fields. for Sort by. ■ 4 Click OK. select Sheet Number. and drag it to the sheet. and click Add. under Sheets (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 7 In the Project Browser.rvt. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Sheet Number. On the Filter tab. enter T. 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. select Sheet Index.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. select Sheet Number. for Filter by. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. in the first field. 5 In the list title field. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. double-click T . you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. enter Sheet Index. 1 In the Project Browser. Using Drawing Lists | 283 .

Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Finally.8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. and door frames. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.rvt. and so on). 2 In the New Legend View dialog. On construction documents. click New ➤ Legend. door frame schedule. windows. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. 9 On the Design Bar. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. click Modify. doors. and click OK. for Name. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. enter Typical Symbol Legend. On construction documents. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. enter 3mm.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. you create a text type with the necessary size. click Text.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. enter Legend Text. for Name. and click OK twice.Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Filled Level Head . and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 6 On the Options bar. 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 . click Symbol. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. select Arial. 10 For Text Size. and click OK. click Duplicate. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click . 9 For Text Font. 13 Working from the top down.

19 In the Project Browser. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. click Typical Symbol Legend. expand Legends. 15 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector.Unit 18. click Modify. expand Sheets (all). drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. double-click A102 . and double-click A101 . 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets. 18 In the Project Browser.Site Plan/Floor Plan. and click to place it. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 17 On the Design Bar. click Typical Symbol Legend.

21 On the Design Bar. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu.rvt. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 3 For Scale. 6 On the View Control Bar. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall.20 In the Type Selector. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. enter 900 mm. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Section. and press ENTER. 5 On the Options Bar. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. select Medium for Detail Level. click Modify. and click OK. click New ➤ Legend. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. click Legend Component. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. For View. For Host length. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. select Viewport : No Titlemark. select1 : 50. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family.

Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. click Modify. click Text. for Family. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. and on the Options Bar. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . verify that Text : Legend Text is selected.9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the second wall.

20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. Creating a Component Legend | 289 . 19 Enter the following text.13 On the Options Bar. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. The text note with leader is added to the legend. for Leader. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader. click to add text with a single-segment leader. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar. pressing ENTER between component descriptions.

select 4th Floor Wall Types. double-click Level 4. 23 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 26 On the Design Bar. and drag it to the new sheet. The open drawings are both visible. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. click Modify to end the command. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 29 In the project Browser. 25 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. right-click Sheets (all). under Floor Plans. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. click OK to accept the default titleblock. under Floor Plans. under Legends. drag it onto the sheet. select Level 4. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser.

Creating a Component Legend | 291 .Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 33 In the floor plan view. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. click (Match Type). select the Wall Type 2 component. The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view.

Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. You can create a sequence of revisions. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 37 Optionally. contractor inquiries. 36 On the View Control Bar. select Medium for Detail Level.35 Select the patio divider wall. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . These changes can be due to owner requests.

all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. If you select By Sheet. Using the table. yet as concise as possible. 5 For Description. For example. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . When Issued is selected. In most instances. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions.rvt. 3 In the Revisions dialog. In this exercise. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. enter a date. If Visible is not selected. double-click Level 4. the revision is locked and issued to the field. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. When you use this option. In general. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. or changes in building material availability. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. 7 Under Visible. if the active revision is number 1. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. click Revisions. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Floor Plans.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Settings menu.

3 Select the divider. click (Move). 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Edit toolbar. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. move the cursor up. double-click Level 4. 5 Select the partition.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched.8 Click OK. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. including revision number and revision date. under Floor Plans. you make changes to the project floor plan. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views.

8 In the drawing area. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Finish Sketch. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . click near the partition you moved. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment.6 On the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Revision Cloud. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Tag ➤ By Category. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select 6. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. for Line Weight. click the Annotation Objects tab. double-click Level 4. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. you load a revision tag into the project. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 16 Click OK. under Floor Plans.rvt. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud.

4 On the Options Bar. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 11 Click to place the tag. You then issue a revision. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud.rfa. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. you need to add one. You do this by issuing the revision. In the Tags dialog. scroll down to Revision Clouds. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. select Leader. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you prevent further changes to the revision. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 10 In the drawing area. 6 Click Load. under Sheets. Because you chose to number by project. 5 In the Tags dialog. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. and because the revision is the first in the project. click Tags. you create additional revisions in the revision table. on which you place a revised view. click OK. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet.Unnamed. double-click A107 . you create a sheet view in your project.rvt. 8 In the Tags dialog. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. Working with Revisions | 297 .

Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. and click OK. for Visible. NOTE After you issue a revision. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. select None for each issued revision. under Add. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. click Revisions. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. On the Settings menu. You can continue to add revisions. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. click New. select Issued. click Revisions. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 6 In the Revisions dialog. you can no longer modify it. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table.

you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. text. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. you learn to import information from other applications. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. into a project. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. Importing from Other Applications | 299 .9 Click OK. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. such as images.Title Sheet. click Training Files.rvt.JPG. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Sheets. Importing Image Files In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and spreadsheets. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click T . 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. and place it on a sheet.

you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. double-click T . under Sheets. click to add text without a leader. for Leader.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Select the text.doc text file in another window. click Modify. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . click Text. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 3 On the Options Bar.5 On the Design Bar. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement.

you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture.Unit 18. click Training Files. click File menu ➤ Print. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Save. enter Fixture Schedule. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog.rvt. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.JPG. 1 In the Project Browser. for Name. 10 On the Design Bar. and saved as Fixture Schedule. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.mdi. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. This process may vary from system to system. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. This step has been completed for you.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 . 5 Click OK. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. 9 On the Design Bar.JPG. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image.xls. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 3 In Microsoft Excel. This exercise demonstrates a common method. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. click Desktop. with the new text box still selected. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. double-click A102 . for File name. click Modify. 4 Under Printer. click Modify. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. select the document writer. under Sheets. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

as well as a large lab building. The large floor plan. 303 . or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you break up the plan into sections. called dependent views.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. To effectively document this project.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .

| 305 .

click Training Files. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 6 In the drawing area. The dependent view opens. double-click Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 5 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. enter Level 2 . you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. right-click Level 2. 306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. for Name. select the crop region. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Level 2. and click Rename.Aviary.

confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). The annotation crop is the exterior crop region.The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. and the model crop is the interior crop region. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 .

11 In the Project Browser. for Name. and click Rename. click Zoom To Fit. 15 Select the crop region. click (Hide Crop Region). enter Level 2 .9 On the View Control Bar. 10 On the Zoom flyout. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs).Labs. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. right-click Level 2. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout.

Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. 20 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. click (Hide Crop Region). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 . click Modify. click Matchline. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. 19 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 2.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. 18 On the Design Bar.

Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 24 On the Design Bar.23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Click above the left corner of the lab building. 310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . click Finish Sketch. and click. (Align with the second column of lab cubicles.

27 Under Matchline. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. 28 For Line Pattern. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. right-click A101 . click OK to accept the default titleblock. select Double Dash. expand Sheets. 31 In the Project Browser. and click OK.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 .Unnamed. select 9. and drag it onto the sheet.Aviary. click the Annotation Objects tab. under Floor Plans. and click OK. and click Rename. for Name. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 33 In the Project Browser. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. click Level 2 . enter Level 2 Aviary. for Line Weight. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.

click View Reference. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.Labs dependent view on the sheet. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. click Modify. for Target view. under Floor Plans. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.Aviary is selected. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . double-click Level 2. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 39 On the Options Bar.35 On the Design Bar. and place the Level 2 .

under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 . 45 On the Zoom flyout. 41 On the Options Bar. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. double-click Level 2 .Aviary. 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. for Target view. 46 In the Project Browser. click (Show Crop Region). 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. 44 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2 .Labs. 47 On the View Control Bar.

leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. after modifying the annotation crop region. 314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. 49 If. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. right-click. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. click the far right control.48 Select the crop region. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.

under Floor Plans. click Zoom To Fit. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 . but are not placed on sheets. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 55 On the Zoom flyout. and click OK. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. 54 In the Project Browser. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. click (Hide Crop Region). 53 In the Select Views dialog. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. click Zoom To Fit. and click Apply Dependent Views. expand Level 1. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. select all views in the list. right-click Level 2. 57 On the Zoom flyout.51 On the View Control Bar.

expand South Elevation. click Training Files. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. The matchline is already placed in the view.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views.Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. 5 In the drawing area. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).Left. and double-click South Elevation. 3 In the Project Browser. The dependent view opens. right-click South Elevation. for Name. enter South Elevation . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select the Crop Region. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Dependent on South Elevation.

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and click OK. cropping the view to the lab building. 9 In the Project Browser. click (Hide Crop Region). and drag it toward the center of the drawing. 8 In the Project Browser.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. 7 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Project Browser. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.Right. for Name. 13 On the View Control Bar. and drag it toward the center of the view. and click OK. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog. under Sheets. right-click A103 Unnamed. enter South Elevation. for Name. right-click South Elevation. and click Rename. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. and click Rename. 11 Select the crop region. click (Hide Crop Region). 10 In the Rename View dialog. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . enter South Elevation . cropping the view to the aviary.

click View Reference. verify that Elevation: South Elevation .Right. click South Elevation . and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. under Elevations. click South Elevation . 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .Left is selected. under Elevations. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. under Elevations. click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar.Left. 20 In the Project Browser. and drag it onto the sheet. for Target view.18 In the Project Browser. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. 25 On the Options Bar. double-click South Elevation.

Right. 31 In the Project Browser. 30 On the Design Bar. double-click A103 . Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 . select Elevation: South Elevation .South Elevation. for Target view. under Sheets (all).28 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Select the crop region. Right-click the view. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. and click Activate View. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.NOTE If the view references are not visible.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

you learn to create and customize views of building information models. how to control fill pattern colors. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views.Viewing 9 In this tutorial. 323 . More specifically.

Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. sections. locate the Project Browser. you learn how to access different views of the building model. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. and three-dimensional (3D) views. on the Standard toolbar. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. expand Views (all). Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model.rvt. including elevation and three-dimensional views. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. and double-click East. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. expand Elevations. click Training Files. click . You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views. You create elevations. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. TIP If the Project Browser does not display.

The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. the east elevation. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. This change is applied only in this elevation view. 7 Click OK. This change is applied only to the active view. scroll down and clear Window Tags. click Model Graphics Style.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. click . The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. and click Hidden Line. click the Annotation Categories tab. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. 6 Under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. The default name of the view is {3D}.

12 Press and hold CTRL. double-click My 3D View. and click OK. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen.9 On the View toolbar. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. expand Views (all). . Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. and expand 3D Views. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. Move the mouse to pan the view. under 3D Views. . You can pan. and click Rename. right-click {3D}. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. 18 In the Project Browser. zoom. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. click X to close the view. The view follows the movement of the cursor. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. enter My 3D View. 16 In the Rename View dialog. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click to reorient the view. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. m_Viewing_Exercise. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing.rvt. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. and distance from the target. Cameras define the eye point. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. and double-click Level 1. After you specify the second point (the view target). eye height. and click View. as shown in the following illustration. click Camera.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. right-click in the Design Bar. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. outside of the dimension lines. expand Views (all). “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.

and sideways to see how the view changes. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. click Dynamically Modify View. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog. down. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. 5 On the View menu. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view. Move the cursor up. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Press and hold the left mouse button. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Press and hold the left mouse button.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model.

click Tile. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. height. and target 12 On the Window menu. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 . Change the camera position. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. Press and hold the left mouse button. 13 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view.

330 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. double-click Level 1. and click Show Camera. right-click 3D View 1. double-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 16 In the Project Browser.

select the camera target point (the magenta grip). and move it to another location. under Camera. In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. and click Shading. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. click to create a new 3D view. 20 On the View Control Bar.17 In My 3D View. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. Click OK. and click Element Properties. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. right-click. click Model Graphics Style. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar.

click View Properties. as shown in the following illustration. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. A section box is displayed around the model. 22 On the View menu. 24 Click the section box. A rotation tool is also displayed. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. select Section Box. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and click OK. under Extents.

and maximize this view. expand Floor Plans.26 Click and hold the rotation tool.rvt. Creating a Section View In this exercise. and rotate the section box around the model. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise. Creating a Section View | 333 . click Section. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. “Creating a Section View” on page 333. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 7 In the Go To View dialog. 8 Select the section line. and double-click Section 1. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing . double-click the section head. click Modify. 6 In the Project Browser. right-click. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. View the section 5 To view the section. expand Sections. 4 On the Design Bar. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. select the section view. or in the Project Browser. and click Find Referring Views. and click Open View.

Creating Elevation Views | 335 . click Elevation. 14 On the Design Bar. Notice the change in the view direction. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise.rvt. 12 Select the section line. move the cursor around the building model. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. m_Viewing_Exercise. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. double-click Level 1. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. under Floor Plans. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. click Modify. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Notice the change in section depth.9 On the Design Bar. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. click Modify. double-click Level 1. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view.

8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. Elevation 1 . Do not select the arrow. zoom in. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. and click. click Modify. double-click Level 1. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow.a by default. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.b.b. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. 5 On the Design Bar. Elevation 1 . under Elevations. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing .4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. double-click Elevation 1 . 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. 10 In the Project Browser.a. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes.

11 If you want to save your changes. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. and other families. where each layer is assigned a different material. such as the one below. and applies to phasing override materials as well. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. and the insulation color to pink. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. a shade of gray. on the File menu. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. such as Brick on CMU. and open Common\c_Showroom. roofs. This includes walls. click Training Files. click Save As. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type.rvt. In addition. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. in a compound wall. For example. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in this case. floors.

View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. select red. 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. 9 In the Materials dialog. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer.Brick for Name. click Color. expand Views (all). select Masonry . and click OK twice. The surface pattern of the brick is black. 5 In the Color dialog. 4 Under Cut Pattern. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . expand 3D Views. The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls.Brick for Name. click Materials.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. expand Views (all). 3 In the Materials dialog.Level 3.Filled). Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. select Masonry . click Materials. 2 On the Settings menu. expand Sections (Section Head .

c_Showroom. and click OK twice. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.10 Under Surface Pattern. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans.rvt. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View menu. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. 11 In the Color dialog. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. click Color. click View Properties. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. select white.

View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 14 If you want to save your changes. click Detail Level. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click Modify. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click OK three times. click Save As. 10 On the Design Bar. and click Element Properties. and click Fine. By default. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. If you create more than one plan region in a file. select a shade of gray. 7 In the Color dialog. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. right-click. 12 On the View Control Bar. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. click Edit/New. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. . select Solid fill for Name. double-click Level 2. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. on the File menu. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.

By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise.coincident edges. or pattern. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. line type. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. line color. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . and you cannot control their visibility. click Training Files. refer to the online Help for more information.

sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. the top and bottom clip planes. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. view range. and the view depth plane. click Lines. which is similar to the view range for plan views. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . the south elevation is also displayed. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. On the Options Bar. Plan regions have a single property. expand Views (all). Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 In the Level 1 view. and double-click Level 1. click . click Plan Region.View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the following illustration.

■ ■ On the Design Bar. top and bottom clip planes. the line turns red. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . enter 4000 for the Top Offset. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. 9 On the Design Bar. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. By selecting Parent View’s Level. and click Element Properties. click Modify. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. 8 Click Apply. under Extents. The plan region displays as a dashed green line. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. and then click OK twice. click Edit for View Range. 4 Select the plan region. 6 In the View Range dialog. right-click. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. Press ESC to end the command. click Finish Sketch. When you select the plan region. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane.

The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 10 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. 344 | Chapter 9 Viewing .

billboards. to place and render decals to create signs. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. and posters.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views. 345 . you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model.

you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. In this exercise. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. When you complete these changes. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. you select a scene that defines the model environment. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. After you create the perspective view.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. and create the perspective view that you want to render. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. the floor. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site.

click Training Files. under Construction. 9 Under AccuRender. under Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Wall.rvt. 8 In the Materials dialog.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Options Bar. and click Edit/New. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. and click the tab in the context menu. click Edit for Structure. click .Brick. select Masonry . Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . right-click in the Design Bar. click Materials. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. verify that Co-house . 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.Cavity Wall .Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click next to Texture to display the Material Library.Brick. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click Materials. click Duplicate. expand Masonry and click Brick. select Polished. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . under Construction. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. 23 Under AccuRender.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. under Name. 19 Click OK four times. expand Metals. click Edit for Structure. click next to Texture to display the Material Library.200mm. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. 24 In the Material Library. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building.Asphalt. under _accurender. enter Aluminum. select Carib. 12 Click OK twice. 26 Click OK twice. click Edit/New. 27 On the Design Bar. under _accurender. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. Polished and click OK. under Name. and click Aluminum. select Site . for Layer 2. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Plain. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. 21 In the Materials dialog. . 18 In the Materials dialog. 11 Under Name. click Modify.Running. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. 25 Under Name. 14 On the Options Bar. 22 In the New Material dialog.

30 In the Element Properties dialog. 29 On the Options Bar. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. select the curtain wall mullion again. click No.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. click in the Material field. select Aluminum. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. and click OK. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. select Exterior under Type. Polished. click Edit/New. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click . under Name. click Region Raytrace. and then click . 33 Click OK three times. floor. verify that New is selected. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . 32 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes.

350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings.rvt. Cnst. when you render an exterior view of the model. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350. you place two different types of trees on the building site. and double-click 1st Flr. 38 On the Design Bar. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. In a later exercise. expand Floor Plans. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. floor. expand Views (all). m_Cohouse. producing a photorealistic effect.

and click Site Component. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . click Modify. 4 In the Type Selector. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. and click to place a tree. select any of the deciduous trees. and click Site.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. and click . right-click in the Design Bar. click Site Component. select M_Tree . Create a new type of tree. 7 In the Type Selector.9 Meters. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

8 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Black. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. and click Deciduous. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. 10 In the Name dialog. 12 In the Plant Library. and click OK. click Duplicate. select Black Oak for Type Comments. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. m_Cohouse. and then click display the Plant Library. click in the Value field for Plant Name. enter Black Oak.rvt. 13 Under Name. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. and place two black oak trees. 15 Under Other. as shown in the following illustration. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 18 Proceed to the next exercise. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. click Edit/New. and click OK. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. under Identity Data. select Oak. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK twice. under accurender. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. expand Trees and Shrubs.

Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. click Camera. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. Creating a Perspective View | 353 . Cnst. The new perspective view is displayed. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. view open.

Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. Cnst. 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand 3D Views. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. view. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). double-click 1st Flr. and click Show Camera. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. Cnst. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.

Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. lighting. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.7 In the Project Browser. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 . m_Cohouse. right-click 3D View 1. and click Rename. double-click Exterior. and environment settings that you use to render the view.rvt. you select a scene and specify time. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter Exterior. place. 8 In the Rename View dialog. date. under 3D Views. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355.

7 Under Date. under Scene Settings. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Time. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. click the Solar Angles tab. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. click Settings. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 6 Select By Date. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 8 Under Time. and click Sun.

and click OK. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 13 Enter . 10 Click in the Cities list. MA. select Good for Quality. 21 Click OK twice. and select Boston. and enter bo. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. The Ground Plane tab displays. under Background Color. click . under Scene Settings. 20 In the Name list. click Site. select Ground Plane. click Raytrace. 19 In the Material Library. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 26 On the Design Bar. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. click No. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. click Capture Rendering. 12 Click the Settings Tab. Rye. 16 In the Environment dialog. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution.9 Click the Place tab. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. select Grass. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 18 Click Material. click Environment. USA. 17 Under Advanced. and click OK. click Image Size.20 for Cloudiness.) 14 Click OK. under Scene Settings. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. Dark. under _accurender. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 11 Scroll down.00 (many clouds. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . select Autumn for Plant Season. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.

Adding RPC People In this exercise. and double-click 2nd Flr. on the File menu. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. To create the rendered scene. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. and finally. Cnst. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. expand Floor Plans. click Save As. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .30 On the Design Bar. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. define the view and render scene settings. expand Renderings.rvt. 32 If you want to save this exercise. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson.

2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). select Rotate after placement. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. click Component. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 4 In the Type Selector.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 7 Repeat steps 4 . Adding RPC People | 359 . 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar.

click Camera.rvt. m_Cohouse. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. 360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Cnst. double-click 2nd Flr. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The interior perspective is displayed. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 .■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table.

362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Size. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. right-click 3D View 1. enter 178 mm for Height. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click the dimensions for Size. enter 229 mm for Width. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click Rename. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK.4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.

Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . 14 On the Design Bar. 11 On the View menu. and click OK. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. click to display the 3D view of the building model. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. A section box is displayed around the building model. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. select Section Box. enter Interior. under Extents. and click OK. click View Properties. 12 On the View menu.9 In the Rename View dialog. and select the section box. Grips are displayed on the section box. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. click Modify.

9 Under Time. and click Save. By limiting the geometry. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 8 Under Date. Time. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. click OK. you create a render scene to specify the time. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 13 Click the Settings tab. select Interior. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 17 In the Environment dialog. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Environment. under Scene Settings. and enter Interior Scene for Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. and select Boston. m_Cohouse. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. 14 Click Save. click Settings. date. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. and click OK. on the Main tab. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. place. under 3D Views. 12 Scroll down. 11 Click in the Cities list. and environment settings used to render the view. 7 Select By Date. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. click the Solar Angles tab. and enter bo.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. 10 Click the Place tab. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select New. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. MA. USA. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes.rvt. you reduce the rendering time. under Scene Settings. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Sun. under Background Color. 4 Under Type. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog.

under accurender. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. 21 In the Name list. 22 Click OK twice. click OK. 19 Click Material. select Summer for Plant Season. Rye. The Ground Plane tab displays. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. click Daylights. and click OK. select {3D}. 20 In the Material Library. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. under 3D Views. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . click Site. double-click Interior. select Ground Plane. as daylight sources. You can select families with transparent materials. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. Dark.rvt. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. select Grass. such as windows and doors. 24 Under Scene Settings. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365. m_Cohouse. Curtain Wall 1). double-click {3D}. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Use View’s Section Box. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. click Radiate. 5 On the Design Bar. 25 Proceed to the next exercise.18 Under Advanced. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.

which can take several minutes. 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the File menu. 10 Close the exercise file. When radiate completes. . click Save As. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. 7 On the Design Bar. begins. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. the following rendered view is displayed. 8 On the Options Bar.The radiosity process. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Raytrace. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. 9 If you want to save your changes. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution.

and open Common\c_Townhouse. and ends in the far corner of the living room. click Settings ➤ Project Units. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. you must select or define a scene. In the left pane of the Open dialog. elevation. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. proceeds through the dining room. but you can also define it in a 3D. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 . you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. The walkthrough path is a spline. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. and change unit formats as desired.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. In a plan view.rvt. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. or section view. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. If you prefer to use Metric values.

and click the tab in the context menu. and click to specify the start point. expand Walkthroughs. on the Options Bar. click . expand Views (all). and double-click 1st Floor. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. click Walkthrough. or the first key frame. right-click in the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and double-click Walkthrough 1.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. of the walkthrough. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration.

The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. click Edit Walkthrough. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. 9 On the Options Bar. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 11 Under Change. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 14 Click .The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). select the crop boundary. 13 On the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. verify Field of view is selected. 12 On the View menu. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. and click OK. and select the crop boundary. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. If it is not.

17 Click .15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. clear Far Clip Active. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. press ESC. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click OK. click . 16 On the Options Bar. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. under Extents. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370. proceed to the next exercise. enter 1 for Frame. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. c_Townhouse. 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . double-click 1st Floor. click Edit Walkthrough. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.rvt. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. The walkthrough plays. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.

The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 6 On the Options Bar. select Path for Controls. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

When you export the walkthrough. 4 Under Format. click Export ➤ Walkthrough. and click Save. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3.rvt.7 Click the third key frame position. select <Shading> for Display mode. under Walkthroughs. specify 15 for Frames per Second. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. hidden line. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. The AVI is recorded. 9 On the Options Bar. shaded. or with AccuRender raytracing. 1 On the File menu. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. shaded with edges. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. and then click to play the walkthrough. click Edit Walkthrough. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. 3 Under Output Length. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. double-click Walkthrough 1. If you are unsure of what option to use. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. 2 In the Save As dialog. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . c_Townhouse.

specifying the number of frames. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 8 If you want to save this exercise.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . reducing the size of the image. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. on the File menu. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. 375 . you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. More specifically. In this tutorial. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.

click Camera. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. A 3D view is created. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all).Courtyard View In this exercise. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. expand Floor Plans. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. Creating a Solar Study . as shown. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and double-click 01 Entry.

Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. expand 3D Views. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. right-click 3D View 1. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 . as shown. enter Solar Study . if necessary. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. click Save As. you create a section cutaway view. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. under Floor Plans. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. 8 In the Project Browser. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view. click to reorient the view. as shown. 9 In the Rename View dialog. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. 10 On the File menu.4 On the View toolbar. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry.Courtyard View. Create section 1 In the Project Browser.

6 To view the section. click Modify. click . click Section. to reorient the view. and click Rename. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and click OK. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 8 In the Rename View dialog. click 10 On the View toolbar. expand Sections. double-click the section head. right-click Section 1. 7 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar.3 On the Design Bar. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and.

such as floor plans and ceiling plans. you create a plan cutaway view. right-click {3D}. 16 On the View Control Bar. On the Annotation Categories tab.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. as shown. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 18 On the File menu.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. 15 In the Rename View dialog. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . and under Orient to a View. do not display many elements in 3D. 14 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. and click OK. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. click Modify. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. then select Medium. Typical plan views. then Fine. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. double-click 01 Entry. clear Section Boxes. In some cases. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. click Callout. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. to expand the dialog. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 17 To hide the section box. including the house. click Save. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. as shown. click Section for Solar Study Cutaway.

5 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Rename View dialog. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. to reorient the view. click . click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. as shown. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. and under Orient to a View. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. under Floor Plans.4 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click 8 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . double-click Callout of 01 Entry. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. and click OK. click Modify. as shown.

right-click {3D}. under 3D Views. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Rename. 18 In the Project Browser. click Save. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 19 In the Rename View dialog. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 . 20 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. and click OK. 16 On the View Control Bar.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. so you can see into the building from the top. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser.15 Select the Roof. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 21 On the File menu.

as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. 10 Under Place. 9 In the Name dialog. CA. You can create a still. 3 Select Cast Shadows.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. single-day. expand 3D Views. you specify the location. and double-click Solar Study . leave the slider at 50. date. and time. 2 On the View Control Bar. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. enter Summer Solstice. expand Views (all). select Los Angeles. and time range. For this study. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. .Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. MA. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click . for City. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. USA is selected. or multi-day solar study. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. date range. and click OK. For the Single-Day solar study.Courtyard View. click . as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. For the Multi-Day solar study. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study.Boston. Los Angeles. you specify the location. and click OK. and click Duplicate. Click the Single-Day tab. USA. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. Creating Solar Studies .

8 On the Options Bar. 2 On the View Control Bar. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . 14 In this case. Los Angeles. 16 In the Name dialog. select Winter Solstice. Los Angeles. click To display the next key frame. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. and click Duplicate. and click OK. 6 On the View Control Bar. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. under Frame. Los Angeles is selected. enter 20 and press ENTER. 7 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Single-Day tab. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select June 22. and click OK. Under Frame. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. click Save. . click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. click OK. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. 2006. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. click . click OK. For Time Range. for Date.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. click . 20 Proceed to the next exercise.Courtyard View is currently displayed. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click . enter Winter Solstice.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. select December 22. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 19 On the File menu. and click OK. Clear Ground Plane at Level. ■ For Time Interval. 2006. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. enter 10 and press ENTER. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. confirm that Summer Solstice. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . approximately as shown. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. and click OK. 13 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click Text. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. Click and enter Dining. double-click 01 Entry. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. click To play the animation from start to finish. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. click .■ To display the next sequential frame. you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. click OK. . 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. approximately as shown. 14 On the Options Bar. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. Click outside of the text box to end the command. on the Single-Day tab. The solar study animation plays. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. select Summer Solstice. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click . under Sun and Shadows Settings. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click .rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson.

select Summer Solstice. select Section Boxes.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . 6 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Lines. 11 To display the section box. and click OK. click . as shown. click OK. on the Single-Day tab. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. Los Angeles. On the Options Bar. and click OK. as shown. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. expand 3D Views. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click . 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. On the Annotation Categories tab. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout.

verify that the value is set to 15. For Frames per second. 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. To maintain the proportions of the frame. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 14 Click outside of the section box. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. and click OK. select AVI Files. as shown. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. for Model Graphics Style. Under Format. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . select the section box. verify that Hidden Line is selected. if necessary. select Frame range. 15 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Under Output Length. and enter 5 to 50. For File name.12 In the drawing area.Los Angeles. For Dimensions. For Save as type. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. On the Annotation Categories tab. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. enter 450 in the first field (width). you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically.

19 In the Video Compression dialog. 8 In the Save As dialog. For Dimensions. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. or GIF. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . select PNG. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. and click OK. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 20 On the File menu. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. click Save. In this example. as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 . select Winter Solstice.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. enter 450 in the first field (width). Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. verify that the value is set to 15. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. or frame.Los Angeles. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. for Model Graphics Style. Under Format. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. Los Angeles. depending on the Frame Range. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. and enter 5 to 10. NOTE When you export to PNG. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Hidden Line is selected. For File name. 18 In the Save As dialog. click Save. click . such as JPEG. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. click OK. Under Output Length. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. on the Single-Day tab. select Frame range. For Save as type. or any single-frame format. of the animation separately. To view the animation. BMP. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. For Frames per second. click Save. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. you open each image. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. for Compressor. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. TIFF.

Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.9 On the File menu.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. under 3D Views. click Save. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise.

Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 .NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. and on the View Control Bar. as shown. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. 5 Select the roof. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.

and click Save. and click OK. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select One week. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . In the Save As dialog. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. click the Multi-Day tab. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. For Time. click Save. clear Section Boxes. MA. 17 On the View Control Bar. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.Boston. and click OK. USA. select Full Frames (Uncompressed).Week Interval. for Compressor. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ .Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. 12 In the Name dialog.Los Angeles . specify 2:00 pm. click OK. For Time Interval. 18 On the File menu. 8 On the View Control Bar. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. Click the Desktop icon. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. and click OK. 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. under Sun and Shadows Settings. for File name enter 2pm .

to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. Orienting to True North | 391 .rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click . 9 Under Date and Time. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. For example. select Summer Solstice. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. click . 2 On the View Control Bar. Then. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. and select Winter Solstice. click . Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 Under Date and Time. change the time back to 12:00 PM. and click OK. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. on the Still tab. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. select Cast Shadows. click Apply. and click OK. specify 11:00 AM for time. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the Still tab. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. In this exercise.

18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. click OK. and click OK. under Floor Plans. under Graphics. In the Element Properties dialog. and select View Properties.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. double-click 01 Entry. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Notice that the project rotates in the view. select True North. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. 13 On the View Control Bar. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. in the Angle from Project to True North field. click the Still tab. for Orientation. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. On the Options Bar. click . and select Winter Solstice. click OK.

NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Los Angeles. For Save as type. click the Still tab. are saved with the project. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. under 3D Views. click . Orienting to True North | 393 . verify that AVI Files is selected. and click OK. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 21 On the View Control Bar. select Summer Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click Summer Solstice. including the angle from True North. In the Save As dialog. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. for File name. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click the Single-Day tab. click OK. and click Apply. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 19 In the Project Browser.

rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. Rendered views do not have this limitation. for Scene. On the Options Bar. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Since a rendered image is temporary. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and exporting it as a JPEG image. and select View Properties. under 3D Views. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. 28 Once you are finished with the study. select Project North. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. capturing it. double-click 01 Entry. 29 On the File menu. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. On the Options Bar. and click Save. Right-click in the drawing area. for Orientation. for Dimensions. Click the Desktop icon. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. under Graphics. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. In this exercise. 2 In the Project Browser. and click OK.■ Under Format. under 3D Views. enter 600 in the first field. click Raytrace. 4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click Save. for Resolution. under Floor Plans. for Compressor. click GO. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. In the Element Properties dialog. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. select Draft (75 dpi). verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected.

NOTE Rendered views are temporary. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. and click Save. click Capture Rendering. so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project.■ ■ On the Options Bar. select Presentation (300 dpi). In the Save As dialog. select JPEG. for Resolution. The scene is rendered in high resolution. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor. 5 On the Design Bar. for Save as Type. In the Project Browser. under Renderings. click Export Image. On the Options Bar. click GO. click Save. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. Rendering an Interior View | 395 . 7 Review some captured images of the building.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

" The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. To express texture beyond material specifics. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. or the client. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 . tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345. For the realistic approach. and Section Boxes. Advanced Model Graphics. sections. type. In this tutorial. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. the Linework Tool. Whether the audience is the general contractor. and details. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. you explore the stylistic approach. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content." In Revit Architecture. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. an outside reviewer. a consultant. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. there are several options for expressing the architecture. length. In this series of exercises. elevations. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents.

Using the pre-built building model. 398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. Co-house.building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales.

you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 . A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. right-click 2nd Flr. Cnst. expand Floor Plans. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique.rvt. you create a copy of the plan. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. you create a presentation floor plan.

7 Under Visibility. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. expand the Stairs category. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click the Scale control and select 1:100. click in the drawing area. click Save As. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. exit the menu. elevations. click Visibility/Graphics. this represents the view getting smaller. dimensions. and clear DOWN Text. Cnst. This turns off the visibility of all tags. and so on in this view. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Notice that no annotations display in this view. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Up Arrow. UP Text. and click OK. and click Rename.2 In the Project Browser. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. sections. click the Annotation Categories tab. 10 On the File menu. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Down Arrow. 8 Click OK.

3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. the darker the shadows.11 In the Save As directory. click . “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. At that place. ■ Under Intensity. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. select Sun and Shadow Settings. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Within a Project. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. you can create. click for Place. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. MA. USA for City. Time and Place. on the Still tab. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Under Shadows Properties. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. navigate to the folder of your choice. 8 Select Boston. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click the Place tab. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. 5 Under Settings.rvt. Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . double-click it in the Project Browser. select Cast Shadows. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. The higher the number. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics.rvt. modify. 6 Under Settings. select By Date. specify 35 for Shadow. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world.

click Save.NOTE For this step. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. click OK. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 11 Click OK. 17 On the File menu. 18 Proceed with the next exercise. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level. under Settings. Cnst. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. and click OK. click . Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. you can enter any city you wish. and select 1st Flr. be aware that if you enter a different city. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. however. clear Ground Plane at Level.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. click Add View. and click View. and notice a view title displays. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. 4 In the Views dialog. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. and click Add View to Sheet. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. and click to place it. click Sheet. click Modify. TIP If the View tab is not available. select Arch Portrait.

select No for Show Title. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics. 12 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. click Duplicate. enter Presentation. click . For this analytique. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. To accomplish this. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Activate View. click Edit/New. and click OK. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title.

click Region Properties. 25 In the Name dialog. click Edit/New. click .16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. under Graphics. click . select Invisible Lines. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. and the boundary of the region. click Duplicate. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. enter Solid Black. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. for Fill Pattern. click . and click OK. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. 17 In the Type Selector. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click Filled Region. 20 On the Options Bar. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. and select Chain. If necessary. When you are finished drawing the chain. 18 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. fill properties.

33 In the Element Properties dialog. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. and click Deactivate View. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. and click View Properties. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. under Identity Data. under Name. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. select Solid Fill. 30 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . scroll down. click Finish Sketch.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click OK. 34 On the File menu. click Save. click OK.

click Visibility/Graphics. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. enter Presentation South Elevation. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. right-click South. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. expand the Doors category. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.rvt. expand Elevations. 2 In the Project Browser. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. and clear Elevation Swing. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Visibility. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 . under Pattern Overrides. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. clear Visible. on the Model Categories tab. under Elevations. under Views (all). and clear Show annotation categories in this view. under Visibility. click in the Walls row. and click OK. scroll up. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click in the drawing area. right-click Copy of South. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Override. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. exit the menu. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 9 Click OK.

click Duplicate. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Save. 12 Under Shadow Properties. Time and Place. and click OK. click . under Settings.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click OK. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. By changing the angle of the sun. specify 35 for Shadow. 13 Under Intensity. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 16 In the Name dialog. 20 On the File menu. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408. select By Date. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet.

3 In the Views dialog. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click A105 . Notice the viewport displays a view title. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 . select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). click Add View. expand Sheets (all). 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.rvt.Presentation.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Add View to Sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

5 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Notice the view title no longer displays. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. click Modify. select Viewport: Presentation.

8 On the File menu. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 . you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. click Save. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. To fit correctly in the analytique. Section 2 is added to the building model. 4 Add the section shown below. To accomplish this. and double-click Section 2. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. expand Sections (Callout 1). Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Floor Plans. click Section. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees.rvt. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 1: 100 for Scale. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. and use the flip arrows if necessary. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click 1st Flr. Cnst. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.

click in the Walls row. double-click Presentation Section 2. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. right-click Callout of Section 2. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. 15 Under Visibility. and click OK. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select 1 : 100 for Scale. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. click Visibility/Graphics. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. click Override. 11 In the Rename View dialog. click the Model Categories tab. under Pattern Overrides. 10 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Section 2. click Modify.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Callout. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). clear Visible. 12 In the Project Browser.

and clear Elevation Swing. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . When you select the crop boundary. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. clear Crop Region Visible. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view.17 Under Visibility. expand the Doors category. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. scroll up. 22 On the Options Bar. clear Annotation Crop. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. under Extents. 20 Click OK. click . 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. specify 35 for Shadow. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Under Shadows Properties. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.24 On the File menu. select Cast Shadows. In addition. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. double-click Presentation Section 2.rvt. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Click Apply. click Save. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. open the Project Browser and. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. 2 On the View Control Bar. Under Intensity. under Sections (Callout 1).

select Directly. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. select Override Silhouettes. Silhouette Edges. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click . and click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.In the steps that follow. select Relative to View. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under Silhouette Edges. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Save. under Settings. click OK. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. was added to this dataset for training purposes. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. and click OK. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 11 On the File menu. NOTE The line style.

and click to place the selected view. select Viewport: Presentation. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Section: Presentation Section 2. under Sheets (all).Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. 3 In the Views dialog. click Add View. click Modify. The view title no longer displays. and click Add View to Sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 . you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees.rvt. double-click A105 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. To rotate an object. 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 9 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Section 2. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. 8 Select the callout that you added previously.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. under Sections (Callout 1). Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. and press ENTER. Using a clock as a reference. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. click . you click to specify the start radius.

After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 . the callout rotates 180 degrees. double-click A105 . and drag it up and to the left as shown.Presentation. 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. under Sheets (all). 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.

17 Proceed with the next exercise. 16 On the File menu. 2 On the View menu. 420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Create View Template from View. and click OK. 4 In the View Templates dialog. click Modify. double-click Presentation Section 2. After applying the view template to a new section view.15 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. enter Presentation.rvt. click OK. 3 In the New View Template dialog. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. under Sections (Callout 1).

and click Add View to Sheet.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. annotations. 14 In the Type Selector. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. click Apply View Template. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click Rename.Presentation. select Presentation. 7 In the Rename View dialog. 16 On the View menu. 9 In the Select View Template dialog. double-click A105 . Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and elevation swings no longer display. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Section 1. and click OK. click View Properties. select Section: Presentation Section 1. 6 In the Project Browser. lighting fixtures. 15 Right-click the viewport. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . Notice the furniture. Now. and click Activate View. you can simply apply the presentation view template. under Sections (Type 1). select Viewport: Presentation. under Sheets (all). enter Presentation Section 1. right-click Copy of Section 1. 12 In the Views dialog. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. click Add View. and click OK.

In this exercise. under Graphics. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet. such as a tracery window or column capital. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Deactivate View. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. 18 Right-click the viewport. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 20 On the File menu. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422.17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

and click OK. enter Presentation Callout. click Callout.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Type 1). 4 In the Project Browser. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. under Sections (Callout 1). 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. double-click Section 1. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. under Sections (Callout 1). 6 In the Project Browser. Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . and click Rename. right-click Callout of Section 1. double-click Presentation Callout. click Modify. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Rename View dialog.rvt. select the callout. After you add the callout.

and click View Properties. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. clear Annotation Crop. 8 Right-click.

13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. select Section: Presentation Callout. click Add View. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . 14 In the Type Selector.Presentation. click View Properties. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog. double-click A105 . select Custom for View Scale. 17 On the View menu. and click Activate View. select Viewport: Presentation. and click Deactivate View.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Add View to Sheet. and click OK. and move it into the position shown below. click Modify. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. under Sheets (all). Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport.

activate the viewport. select Solid Black for Type. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. and make adjustments as necessary. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. click Filled Region. click Region Properties. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and click OK. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. 426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. In the steps that follow. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Presentation Callout. When finished. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. 23 On the Design Bar. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. under Sections (Callout 1). hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport.

Presentation. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. click Filled Region. under Sheets (all). Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . and sketch the rectangle shown below. double-click A105 . click . and click Activate View.26 On the Project Browser.

33 Select the crop region. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 31 On the View menu. select Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click View Properties.30 On the Design Bar. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.

Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. click Save. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. click View Properties. and apply shadows to the views. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Deactivate View. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . 37 On the File menu. under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK.34 On the View menu.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.rvt. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. select Cast Shadows. Under Shadows Properties. 3 On the View Control Bar. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 2 On the View menu. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click the Scale control. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Under Intensity. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. and click 1 : 200. click . 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 7 In the Name dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. double-click Isometric. click Orient ➤ Southwest. click Duplicate. specify 35 for Shadow.

click View Properties. Select Relative to View. and click OK. 16 In the Rename View dialog. under Settings. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 . 9 Click OK. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Select Ground Plane at Level. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. Select 1st Flr. 14 In the Project Browser. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. 18 On the View menu. and click Rename. enter Isometric 1. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. under 3D Views. 13 In the Rename View dialog. in the list. 15 In the Project Browser.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. Cnst. under Extents. double-click Isometric 2. select Override Silhouettes. enter Isometric 2. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Isometric. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. select Section Box. right-click Isometric 1. under Silhouette Edges. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. and click OK. and click OK. under 3D Views. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.

These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. When you are finished. and click Rename. 23 In the Project Browser. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. You can use this to rotate the section box. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .20 Select the section box. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. make a duplicate of the view. right-click Isometric 2.

and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. 26 To hide the section box. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. and click OK. under 3D Views.24 In the Rename View dialog. in the Type Selector. When you are finished. double-click Isometric 3. double-click Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. 34 In the Project Browser. the stairs and railings may display. clear Section Boxes. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. double-click A105 . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 25 In the Project Browser. click Modify on the Design Bar. select Viewport: Presentation. In such a case. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. either adjust the plane location. 31 To hide the section box. 29 Select the section box. Notice the section box no longer displays. Next. under Sheets (all). under 3D Views. and click OK.Presentation. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . enter Isometric 3. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure.

35 In the Project Browser. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 36 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. in the Type Selector. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. in the Type Selector.

This will make it easier to draw lines. select Transparent for Background. select Concrete for Type. select Solid Black for Type. under Graphics. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. The image below shows the lines redrawn. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . click Finish Sketch. 44 Using the drawing tools. click Region Properties. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. and then click Edit/New. 45 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Element Properties dialog.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 39 On the Design Bar. and click Activate View. click Lines. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. click Edit. 47 On the Design Bar. 42 Click OK twice. 43 On the Design Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. and click Deactivate View. click Region Properties. 38 Select the poche filled region. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 46 In the Element Properties dialog.

“Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. then you specify the eye direction and range. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. you create the final view for the analytique.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. you add it to the presentation sheet. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. a cutaway perspective view. click Save. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Cnst.49 On the File menu. click Camera. double-click 1st Flr. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown.

specify 35 for Shadow. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.The view opens immediately. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Intensity. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 . and click Advanced Model Graphics. Under Shadows Properties.

11 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. and click OK. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . A section box now cuts through the building model. and click OK. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. Notice the controls that display on each plane. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. under Silhouette Edges. select Override Silhouettes. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. click View Properties.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Add a section box 10 On the View menu. under Extents. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. 12 Select the section box. and click OK. 9 Under Silhouette Edges.

Clear Crop Region Visible. After placing it. 15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 165 mm for Width. and click OK. under 3D Views. 19 To hide the section box. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. click Size. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . 21 In the Project Browser. you must specify the actual size of the image.14 Select the crop boundary.Presentation. double-click A105 . 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. 18 To hide the crop region. under Sheets (all). go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. select Scale (locked proportions). click View menu ➤ View Properties. On the Annotation Categories tab. under Change. 17 Under Model Crop Size.

and click OK. and click OK. select Text : Title.22 On the File menu. click Edit/New. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 5 In the Name dialog. specify a text size of 6 mm. under Text. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Description. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Name dialog. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. click Edit/New. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select a font. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Text. click Save. enter Title. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click . click Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click OK. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Text. click Duplicate. and click OK. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select the same font as the title. specify a text size of 40 mm.rvt.

15 In the Type Selector. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. click Save. Annotating the Analytique | 441 . click Modify.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 17 On the Design Bar. 18 On the File menu. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. select Text : Description.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . verify Basic Wall: Generic . for Loc Line. click you created. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. click Modify to end the command. 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 In the Type Selector. 16 On the View toolbar. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. select Core Face: Exterior. 19 On the Design Bar. click .15 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face.200mm displays.

27 Select the left face of the left mass. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .23 On the View toolbar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. click Create System. 26 In the Type Selector. Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar. click to view only the walls and roofs. 29 Using the same technique. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. 28 On the Options Bar. click Curtain System.

34 Select the mass face shown below. click Create Roof.30 On the View toolbar. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. select the other wall. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. and select it. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. click Roof by Face. and on the Options Bar. click . 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below.

click to view the building that you have created. 39 Click to redisplay the masses. click Wall by Face. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . 38 On the View toolbar. click Curtain System. click Create System. and on the Options Bar. 36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. and select the mass face shown below.Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar.

roofs. Below the right corner of the view. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. under Floor Plans. 44 On the View toolbar. In the far left corner of the building that you created. click Camera. to view only the walls. The perspective view created by the camera displays. specify a point to place the camera. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . click in the view. as shown. double-click Level 1.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify a point for the camera target.

Click the frame to display its grips. click Modify. Under Grid 1 Pattern. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .You may need to resize the view again. Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. click . Click OK. Under Grid 2 Pattern. for Justification. 46 On the Options Bar. select Center. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar. and select the left curtain system in the view. for Justification. select Center.

57 In the Type Selector. 56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and move the roof edges as shown below. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays.50 Select each roof to display its grips. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . double-click 3D View 1. click . 51 Right-click. 55 On the View toolbar. and click Cancel to end the command. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. 52 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click {3D}. 58 Add doors to the building as shown below. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. click Door.

59 Save and close the drawing. 472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. 475 . In this tutorial. shape. each with a different size. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. they are still related and come from a single source. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. material set. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. thus the term family.

rfa extension. for example. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . and furniture. but you cannot create new system families. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. This makes file management much easier. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. exterior. and when and how to use it. such as a dome roof. and roofs. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . foundation. You also learn about the Family Editor. In this lesson. however. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. has wall types that define interior. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. trees. transfer them from one project to another. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. Using the Family Editor. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. because there is only one file to track. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. In addition. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. Walls. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. You can load them into projects. generic. Host-based families have components that require hosts. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. exceptions to this rule. floors. For example. while many more are stored in component libraries. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. Standalone families include columns.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . Family templates are either host-based or standalone. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. and roofs are examples of these types of families. floors. and partition wall styles. Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. The basic walls system family. There are.rfa extension. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project.

such as plan.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. In this section. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. To add a family to your project. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. it is saved with the project. if you change the original family. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. or 3D. and also a standalone furniture family component. you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. how to access it. you can drag it into the document window. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. Load Family command on the File menu. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. You create in-place families only within the current project. and when to use it. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. After the family has been loaded in the project. custom wall treatments. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. However. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. elevation. for example. you learn about the Family Editor. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 . and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. 2 On the File menu. or you can load it using the Load From Library. In the final exercise.

navigate to a family file. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 5 Finally. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. open it in the Family Editor. you learn when to use the Family Editor. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. consider checking the web library and other web resources. In this case. and then load it into the project. if you have exhausted your external resources. With Revit Architecture open. 3 Next. When the family opens. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. how to access it. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. Within the Windows® environment. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. presume it is a bay window that you require. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. it opens within the Family Editor. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. you can double-click any file with an . you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. select the appropriate template. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. and click Open. 9 Save the newly-defined family. and click Open. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. it should be available within the Type Selector. If you find a close match.In this exercise. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. To start a new family. such as newsgroups. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. you can click File ➤ Open. modify it as needed.

you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. you create it within the project file. you create an in-place family. In each lesson.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. You create a furniture family. you learn how to create a different type of component. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. not within the Family Editor. When you create an in-place family. a lighting fixture. Using the installed templates. and several annotation families. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. In addition. 479 .

Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. and pin those reference planes. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. continue to incrementally add reference planes. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. Note that no geometry is created. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. create different host types for testing purposes. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. if the family includes a host. To quit the sketch mode. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. and test after each step. and export settings for selected geometry. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. if required. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. line colors. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. switch between the different host types. Solids and Voids are sketch based. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. materials. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. it automatically cuts the solid. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open. Revolve. and Sweep. If you place the void before you add the solid. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. build geometry. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . lineweight settings. Blend. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. Base and Top. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. When you are in sketch mode. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. line patterns. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. Each sketch is set to a different height. fill patterns.

Level is open. The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. select Metric Furniture. 5 While pressing CTRL. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view. and create one to the right. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog. therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. The floor plan Ref. and click OK. Adding Reference Planes Next. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Using the same method. . 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back). on the Edit toolbar. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. and create one below. and on the Options Bar. click to pin the reference planes. Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . You have created a new furniture family. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. click Ref Plane. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. and click Open. select both reference planes. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane.rft. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

click .4 Click Modify. 482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Left. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views. Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and. on the Options Bar. and click OK.

define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. select Left. left. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. use Left for the Is Reference value. The reference allows minor strength snapping. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. as shown. Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. 1 Select the Left reference plane. and click OK. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. click . If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. name the other reference planes Right. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. Front.7 Using the same method. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. These behave the same as strong references. These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. right. and Back. top). for Other ➤ Is Reference. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. the strong reference is always captured first. and on the Options Bar. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter.

and press ENTER. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and Back). select Add Parameter. and click above the planes to place the dimension. For Group parameter under. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Repeat for the other reference plane. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. and press ENTER. Click the temporary dimension.3 Using the same method. 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string. Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes. Front. for Label. specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 750mm. We want drive Length. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter. select Dimensions. Width. and Height as parameters of the furniture family. Repeat for the other reference plane. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. enter Length. 5 Click Modify. Click OK. 6 Select the dimension line. for Name. Click the temporary dimension. enter 300mm. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane.

Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.9 Using the same method. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 . and click the EQ symbol above the dimension. click to place the dimension. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter. dimension the horizontal reference planes. 11 Click each of the vertical reference planes. 12 Using the same method.

name them Base Left. select Not a Reference. Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. you need to specify the Is Reference values. Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. and click OK.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Base Right. for Other ➤ Is Reference. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension. click the base reference planes. 14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. 15 Using the Element Properties dialog. 16 While pressing CTRL. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Now the reference planes can be used in the family. and click . click Ref Plane. but do not appear in the project. Base Front. and Base Back. 17 In the Element Properties dialog.

20 On the Design Bar.19 Using the same method. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 . position the remaining new reference planes. and lock the dimension. 21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes. click Dimension.

Click OK. click Ref Plane. and lock the dimensions. you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. 488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 Select the middle reference plane. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. By default. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . and section views. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. Under Is Reference. 23 In the Project Browser. The front view displays.22 Using the same method. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. double-click Front. You can dimension reference planes in plan. select Not a Reference. enter Base Bottom. under Elevations. Next. elevation. dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. For Identity Data ➤ Name.

33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. Click OK. Under Is Reference. 32 On the Design Bar. for Name. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . on the Options Bar. Click OK. For Identity Data ➤ Name. navigate to Training/Metric/Families. select Top. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Under Group parameter under. 36 Click Modify. for Label. 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane. click Dimension. enter Top. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. and save the file as Cabinet. and click to place the dimension. select Add Parameter. 34 Lock the dimension. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . In the next exercise.29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm. select Dimensions.rfa. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog. The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. 30 With the top reference plane still selected. 37 Select the last dimension added. enter Height.

8 Using the same method. enter 2000. and click OK. click Family Types. For Length. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. for Height. and dimensions are specified. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. 1 In the Project Browser. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. 3 In the Family Types dialog. but no geometry has been added. 5 Using the same method. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. enter 800. enter 1000. NOTE In the Family Types dialog. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600. click New. 11 Click OK. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. for Height. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. for Name. enter 1800. for Width. enter 2800. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. Level. under Floor plans. When a family is loaded in a project. 7 Click Apply. under Family Types. each type is represented with selected parameters. 10 Click Apply. enter 1000. 4 In the Name dialog. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. for Width. parameters. double-click Ref. For Length. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes.

2 On the Design Bar. In that case. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. select the geometry. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. double-click Ref. under Floor Plans. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. Level. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog. Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Geometry In this lesson. you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. where you can define the plane. create an extrusion from the plan view. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. In such an instance.

An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Finish Sketch. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. 6 On the Sketch tab. 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes. 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane. When the setup is more complex. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool.3 On the Options Bar. click . You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes. do not sketch directly on the reference planes. the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. When the parameters Length and Width change.

9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference. 10 Lock the dimension. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it. Creating Solid Forms | 493 . double-click Front. click (Align). under Elevations. 8 On the Options Bar.Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser.

under Elevations. click Visibility.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. and click OK. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. double-click Front. 23 Save the file. 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The base should display only in elevation and 3D views. 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 13 On the Design Bar. 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). click . double-click Ref. 18 On the Tools toolbar. under View Specific Display. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. under Floor Plans. click . 20 Click Modify. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Level. and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. 17 In the Project Browser. Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. clear Plan/RCP. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference.

8 While pressing CTRL. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. 12 In the Family Types dialog. but not in coarse. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. and section views. clear Coarse. The lines display again. 2 While pressing CTRL. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . They are view direction specific. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. 13 Click OK. Click Modify. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. and click Apply. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. 4 On the Design Bar. verify that the Line tool is active. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. Level. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. 14 On the View Control Bar. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. click Visibility. click Symbolic Lines. and click OK. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes. The lines are greyed out. elevation. and lock the geometry. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. and section views of the family. 10 On the View Control Bar. under Floor plans. select the symbolic line. elevation. select both lines and. 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. When you use 3D geometry. double-click Ref. and lock the geometry. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. By design. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click Family Types. and click the locks to create the constraint. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. the software automatically creates the correct plan. For example. For the furniture family. under Detail Levels. select a different family type.

5 Save the file. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. double-click View 1. set a 3D view of the family current. The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. This opens a predefined 3D view. Before you save the family. under 3D views. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View. 496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser.The geometry of the furniture family is complete. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. this view is maintained when the family is opened again.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. All the family types you created are listed as options.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. click Load into Projects. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. If required. drag each of the types into the drawing area. The family is loaded into the new project. click . Creating a Door Family In this lesson. and click to place them. 13 Close all open projects or families. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. 11 Click Modify. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Views toolbar. click (3D). Creating a Door Family | 497 . 10 In the Project Browser. under Cabinet. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. 9 In the Project Browser.

and thickness. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door. height. The door type has a variable height and width. click Training Files.

and represent the door opening profile. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. 5 On the Window menu. Level. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click Symbolic Lines. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. 7 Enter ZF. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. click Tile. part of the door properties. Labelled dimensions. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . Notice the four tiled views. are also displayed. 10 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Selector. click . The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. 6 Maximize the window. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening.4 On the View menu. Floor Plan: Ref. select Doors [projection].

500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. click Dimension. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar.

Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 . a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. click Modify. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 19 On the Options Bar. select Thickness for Label. 17 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. select Width for Label. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.

click . you first specify the arc center. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click Symbolic Lines. 24 Enter SI. as shown. 22 In the Type selector. 21 On the Design Bar. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. When drawing an arc from center and end points. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. In the image below. click the down arrow button. select Plan Swing [cut]. and select the command from the menu. along with the witness line controls.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. 23 On the Options Bar. then you specify each end point.

and click . under Elevations. click Lines. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. 6 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 .Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. enter 50 mm for Depth. and click OK. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. double-click Exterior. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane.

use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. then click to specify the dimension witness line. click Dimension. double-click Left. click Finish Sketch. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 On the Design Bar.8 On the Design Bar. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion.

under Floor Plans. Left/Right. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. double-click Ref. and click OK.12 On the Design Bar. select Thickness for Label. 14 In the Project Browser. 19 Under Detail Levels. 17 On the Options Bar. under View Specific Display. and Fine are selected. click Modify and select the dimension. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click Visibility. verify that Coarse. and clear Plan/RCP. click Modify. 13 On the Options Bar. Level. select Front/Back. and When cut in Plan/RCP. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . Medium.

Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. under Name. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. click Modify. select Panel for Subcategory. select Oak Door for Name. click Materials. for Material. click OK. select Oak Door. 7 In the Materials dialog. 4 In the Materials dialog. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.20 On the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. click Duplicate. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. you assign a material to the door leaf. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Material Library dialog. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Material. click OK. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. 3 In the New Material dialog. click 17 In the Materials dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. click . “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. click for Texture. and click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click OK. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. click OK. click . 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click 11 In the Materials dialog. enter Oak Door for Name. 2 In the Materials dialog.Red/Stained. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. It also defines its appearance when rendered. under AccuRender. click . 15 On the Options Bar.No Gloss. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak.Dark. and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

under Views (all). View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. and select Shading with Edges. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. 21 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. click the Model Graphics Style control. double-click View 1. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 .

This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. 25 In the Family Types dialog. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Under Other. click New. 27 Click OK. Under Other. under Family Types. enter 2000 mm for Height. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. enter 2500 mm for Height.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. 3 In the Name dialog. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. Enter 1500 mm for Width. In the Family Types dialog. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. 24 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. Enter 1000 mm for Width. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Family Types. click Family Types. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. By flexing the new component.

click Wall.rfa. Defining New Door Types | 509 . 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click Load. enter 2134 mm for Height. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 12 On the File menu. Training Door. Click Apply. 9 In the Name dialog. click New ➤ Project. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. Define the third new door type. and click OK. click Browse. 10 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. 20 In the Open dialog. enter 2000 mm for Height. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Open. 7 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 750 mm for Width.4 In the Family Types dialog. click Training Files. and click OK. click New. click Door. Enter 1220 mm for Width. click New. 5 Under Family Types. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. Training Door. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rte. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. click Save. 6 In the Name dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. 19 On the Options Bar. select it. Enter 925 mm for Width. Click Apply. 11 Click OK. Click Apply. under Template file. 17 Under Create new. Define the second new door type. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. enter 2100 mm for Height. 8 Under Family Types. select Project. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. 15 In the New Project dialog. 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name.rfa. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar.

26 In the Type Selector. click the Model Graphics Style control. click . 28 In the Type Selector. 24 On the View Control Bar. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. click Door. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. and select Shading with Edges. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 On the Design Bar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm.23 On the View toolbar.

and mullion offset. Creating a Door Family. This completes the lesson. height. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. Creating a Window Family | 511 . You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. glazing and mullions as extrusions. default sill height. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. Creating a Window Family In this lesson.30 In the Type Selector. and specify values for the window width. and create the window sash as a sweep. Finally. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. 32 You can close all files without saving. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. You create the window frame.

5 Enter ZF.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. The window type has a variable height and width. The label name. is one of the type parameters. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view.rft. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. When you add labels to dimensions. also one of the window properties. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. equally spaced vertical mullions. you specify the parameters for the new window family. click New ➤ Family. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. Height and Default Sill Height.

you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. and click Apply. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. Change the height and width values again. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. and click Apply. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. click . click Sketch 2D Path. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. Enter 1800 mm for Width. enter 1300 mm for Height. This is the starting point for the new window. 10 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. 8 In the Family Types dialog. This process is called “flexing the model. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Snap the cursor to each corner. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. then sketching the sweep profile. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. click Family Types.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed.

and specify an offset of 50 mm. click Finish Path. click . click the Scale control. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 13 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 On the Design Bar. and select 1:10. and click Open View.6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size. 10 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Go To View dialog. click Ref Plane. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. select Elevation: Right. 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. click Sketch Profile. 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

16 On the Options Bar. select Chain and click . Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. 25 Below the red dot. and select the dimension. 18 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . and select the reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. select Prefer: Wall faces. click . 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 24 On the Options Bar. 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 21 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Sash for the Name. click Lines. click Modify. under Identity Data. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. 20 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click Modify. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. However. 26 On the Design Bar. 516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. and drag it to the interior face of the wall.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. When the lock displays. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. When the lock displays. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. the exact dimensions are not critical.

click Modify. 31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . as shown. click Dimension. and specify the dimension value. When the lock displays. TIP After adding the dimension.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. 30 On the Design Bar. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. select the line you want to move.

Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. click .Modify each dimension if necessary. 37 On the Design Bar. When the lock displays. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Next. When the lock displays. 34 On the Tools toolbar. click the lock to constrain the present value. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. click Finish Sweep. click Finish Profile. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. zoom out until it displays. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. this is the top of the window opening. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. click the lock to constrain the present value. 36 On the Design Bar. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays.

If necessary. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. under Views (all). 38 In the Project Browser. 39 In the Project Browser.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. and click OK. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519. 40 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. and enter . 3 In the Work Plane dialog. under Elevations. Chain of walls or lines. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. expand 3D Views. and select the option. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . click Set Work Plane. click Lines. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. and select Lock. and double-click View 1.45 mm for Depth. click . double-click Exterior. 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. click Finish Sketch. set the following options: Click . 520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . ■ ■ Enter . and lock icons display on each line. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.The entire sash outline is selected. 9 On the Design Bar. ■ Click .50 mm for Offset. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame.

“Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. under Elevations. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. double-click Right.10 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. The window sash extrusion is now complete. double-click View 1.

522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 30 mm for Offset. double-click Right. under Elevations. as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. 2 On the Design Bar. click .

click Set Work Plane. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. 14 In the Work Plane dialog. click . and click OK. click Dimension. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary. click Modify.5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the reference plane. under Identity Data. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. and select Lock. 16 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. 11 In the Project Browser. enter -12 mm for Depth.

View the window model with frame. click Modify. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. After the family is loaded into a project. sash. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Design Bar. click . click Finish Sketch. double-click Right. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog. under Elevations. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 On the Options Bar.18 On the Design Bar. 20 Select the glass extrusion. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. and click OK.

Under Other. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles.24 In the Project Browser. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. enter 1500 mm for Height. under 3D Views. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. NOTE After flexing the model. For example. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Click Apply. click Family Types. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 . double-click View 1. 26 In the Family Types dialog. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines.

double-click Exterior. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Edit toolbar. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. 4 On the Design Bar. click to return the window to its original dimensions.27 Click Cancel. click Ref Plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . the exact location is not critical. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. click Dimension. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. 2 On the Design Bar. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. under Elevations. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise.

5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. as shown.Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. After adding the dimension. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. Do not be concerned with dimension values. click Modify. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar.

Under Group parameter under.9 On the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. select Dimensions. Select Instance..> for Label. enter Mullion Offset for Name. select Family parameter. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select <Add parameter. Click OK.. click Family Types. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. and click OK. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. under Dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar.

Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. move the dimension value as shown. click Lines. 22 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. and enter 350 mm as the new value. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. and click OK.14 Click the dimension value. enter 14 mm for Depth. As you did before. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. 15 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select Mullion Offset for Label. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . However. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 23 On the Options Bar. and click . click Modify.

26 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Move the dimension values as shown. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. click Dimension. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash.After you complete the sketch. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines.

select Dimensions. Select Type. 29 On the Design Bar. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. enter Mullion Width for Name. 30 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select <Add parameter> for Label. Under Parameter Data.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. select Family parameter. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . Click OK. Under Group parameter under. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type.

and click Apply. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Select the dimension. Remember. 33 On the Design Bar. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. click Family Types. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. click Finish Sketch. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. select Mullion Width for Label. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. This is changed in later steps. 35 In the Family Types dialog.

You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. 38 On the Edit toolbar. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. click Set Work Plane. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. or undoing the same. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. 41 In the Work Plane dialog.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 37 Click Cancel. and click OK. 40 On the Design Bar. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. In this case. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and aligned with the sash edge. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . Under Other. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. evenly spaced. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 1500 mm for Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Click Apply. NOTE After flexing the model. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name.

44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. 47 On the Design Bar. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Dimension. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. 45 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 49 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. click . click Dimension. 43 On the Options Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal.42 On the Design Bar. as shown.

click Finish Sketch. select Mullion Width for Label.50 On the Options Bar. Move the dimension value as shown. select Mullion Width for Label. ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. and on the Options Bar. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. Remember. Select the dimension. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously.

Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu. under 3D Views. and select the vertical mullions.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. If necessary. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. double-click View 1. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 55 In the Project Browser. 54 Select the horizontal mullions. click Join Geometry.

Enter 1500 mm for Width. Under Other. enter 1500 mm for Height.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. 59 Click Cancel. 58 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 57 On the Design Bar. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. so when you open the Family Types dialog. you can still see the window. click Family Types.

double-click Exterior. you assign materials to the frame. 8 On the View Control Bar. 9 Select the window frame sweep. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Materials. Dark. click OK. 5 In the Material Library dialog. 3 In the New Material dialog. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . No Gloss. sash. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. and click OK. 6 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. and select Shading with Edges. under Elevations. 2 In the Materials dialog. Yellow/. the sash. click for Texture. under AccuRender. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. 4 In the Materials dialog. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. and the mullions. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser.60 On the Edit toolbar. select Stained. sash. enter Pine Frame for Name. click the Model Graphics Style control. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. click Duplicate.

under 3D Views. click Visibility. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. clear the other view options. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 13 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. Medium. under Identity Data. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. select Pine Frame for Name. verify that Coarse. click OK.10 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 . under View Specific Display. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click . 16 Under Detail Levels. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). and Fine are selected. under View Specific Display. verify that Coarse. 21 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click for Material. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. and click OK. 20 Select the glass extrusion. select Edit for Visibility. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and Fine are selected. Medium. double-click View 1. 23 Under Detail Levels. 24 In the Project Browser. double-click Right.

You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.25 Zoom in on a window corner. and glass display their assigned materials. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. The window frame. sash. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. mullions. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window.

and click Apply. In the Family Types dialog. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height. and click Apply. Defining New Window Types | 541 . 2 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 3 In the Family Types dialog. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window.

but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. and click OK. Enter 1250 mm for Height. 5 In the Family Types dialog. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 In the Name dialog. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. 8 In the Family Types dialog. and click Apply.The window height is doubled. enter 1000 mm for Height. Click Apply. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. click New. under Family Types.

click to start a new project based on your default template. Enter 1500 mm for Height. click Load.9 Under Family Types. click New. 19 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Training Window. Enter 1300 mm for Height. click New. 10 In the Name dialog. Defining New Window Types | 543 . click Window. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width.rfa. Click OK. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. Click Apply. and click OK. 13 In the Name dialog. Click Apply. 14 In the Family Types dialog. 11 In the Family Types dialog. click Save. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. 15 On the File menu. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar.

click the Model Graphics Style control. click Thin Lines.20 In the Open dialog. 27 In the Type Selector. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. 34 On the View toolbar. click Modify. select it. click Wall. 25 In the Type Selector. 35 On the View Control Bar. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. and select Shading with Edges. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. click Window. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 31 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. and click Open. 32 On the View menu. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h.rfa file. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. Notice the detail that displays. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 24 On the Options Bar. 33 Zoom in on the center window. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h.

line colors. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. Solid Blend. and materials of the subcategories. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. For example. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. Model lines are displayed in every view. Instance parameter means. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. you plan. sketch. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. model lines. Solid Revolve. elevation. and create a complex window family with a complex opening. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. This allows you to drive lineweights. and section views of a family. a parameter drives geometry in a family. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. Basically. line patterns. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family.

Section. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project.■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. and Elevation views. and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself. Medium and Fine. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse. you should define different widths for each of the casements. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

The family editor is opened with a new window family. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates.The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. click Training Files. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . 1 Close all open projects or families.rft. you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family. and click Open. The family template uses a wall as host. You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. select Metric Window. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.

for Is Reference. so you model the new opening first. This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. 10 Click OK 3 times. select Weak Reference. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. click Ref Plane. enter Insertion Edge. In the Type Selector. and click . 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . refer to the command line to verify what is selected. and click OK. 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 400. in the Edit toolbar. and click OK. Click OK. for Structure ➤ Thickness. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. for Construction ➤ Structure. . 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. accept the default name. click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. Under Other. This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. . 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. and on the Options Bar. 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. under Other. for Name. select Defines Origin. click . Verify that Defines Origin is selected. select Wall Closure. and on the Options Bar. 7 In the Name dialog. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 Click Modify. click Edit/New. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog.4 Select the wall. click Edit. click Duplicate.

on the Options Bar. 12 Using the same method. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. for Label. Click OK. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. 17 Click Modify. click Dimension. for Name. and click OK.10 Select the first reference plane you created. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. click Dimension. for Identity Data ➤ Name. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. enter Insertion Depth. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. and click . 23 Click Modify. dimension the vertical reference planes. By extending the reference pane. for the temporary dimension. Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Constraints. 14 Using the same method. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. 19 Select the dimension. Next. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. select Add Parameter. For Group parameter under. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Wall Offset Left. enter 75. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. and select Instance. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing.

38 Select the dimension. click Dimension. and press ENTER. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. 25 Select the dimension. select Add Parameter. select Construction. under Elevations. Click OK. 28 Select the dimension. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. The skeleton for the opening is complete. enter 100. 33 Select the new reference plane. 30 On the Design Bar. select Add Parameter. 32 Click Modify. and click . click Ref Plane. on the Options Bar. 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. for the temporary dimension. for Label. select Construction. for Label. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. Next. double-click Exterior. enter Wall Offset Top. Click OK. for Name. on the Options Bar. for Identity Data ➤ Name. for the temporary dimension. enter Wall Offset Top. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. For Group parameter under. enter Wall Offset. 35 On the Design Bar. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. 27 Using the same method. and click OK. Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. for Name. for Label. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. For Group parameter under. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Wall Offset. enter 100.

7 Select the Exterior reference plane. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry. and Wall Offset Right reference planes. click . 6 On the Tools toolbar. 1 In the Project Browser. select Reference Plane : Sill. 8 Using the same method. and click OK. NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. under Specify a new Work Plane. 5 On the Options Bar.40 Save the file as Casement Window. 4 On the Design Bar. for Name. and sketch the extrusion as shown.rfa. double-click Ref. click (Plane). 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 . and lock the alignment. Wall Offset Left. select the top edge of the sketch. Level. lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. 2 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. click (Align).

you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. and Left reference planes. 15 Using the same method. align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. click Finish Sketch.9 On the Design Bar. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. click (Align). 10 Using the same method. and lock the alignment. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). Also. 12 On the Tools toolbar. 16 On the Views toolbar. Interior. create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown. NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. under Elevations. double-click Exterior. 11 In the Project Browser. Right. Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and lock the alignment. and press DELETE. In order to use the voids as a new opening. click (3D).

and then select the wall geometry. 19 Select the void. 20 Using the same method. cut the second void from the wall. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 . 18 On the Tools toolbar. The first void is cut from the wall. you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters.The opening in the wall is deleted. click (Cut Geometry). Next.

1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. and click . enter 50mm. click Family Types. For Other ➤ Is Reference. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 3 Select the reference plane. Level. enter Frame Left. For Wall Offset. select Not a Reference. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . enter 100mm. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. enter 50mm. click Dimension. 5 On the Design Bar. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. for the temporary dimension. Click OK. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. Click OK. 9 Select the reference plane.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. Note that the opening has changed correctly. 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top.

select Not a Reference. select Frame Width. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown. enter 100mm. 14 Select the right dimension. select Construction. Click OK. for Label. on the Options Bar. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . For Group parameter under. for the temporary dimension. enter Frame Width. 11 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 16 Select the left dimension. name it Frame Interior. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter Frame Right. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. for Label. select Add Parameter.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. For Other ➤ Is Reference. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane. on the Options Bar. for Name. click Dimension. 17 Using the same method.

name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension. dimension the planes at 120mm. 19 Using the same method used previously.18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise. The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important.

and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . enter Frame Height Top. for Label. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. For Group parameter under. select Not a Reference. enter 150mm. For Identity Data ➤ Name. enter Frame Bottom. For Group parameter under. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane. select Construction. on the Options Bar. under Elevations. 30 Select the other dimension. For Other ➤ Is Reference. name it Frame Top. select Add Parameter. Click OK. on the Options Bar. for Label. double-click Exterior. select Add Parameter. 22 Select the reference plane. select Construction.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. enter Frame Height Bottom. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 28 Select the lower dimension. 24 On the Design Bar. Click OK. click Dimension. 27 Using the same method. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . for the temporary dimension. Click OK.

enter 2000mm. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . For Center Post Width. Under Construction. enter 1500mm. for Frame Depth. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. and click OK. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. For Frame Height Top. For Wall Offset.The skeleton of the window frame is complete. enter 100mm. for Insertion Depth. enter 100mm. enter 70mm. Before you model the frame geometry. for Wall Offset Top. Under Construction. 37 In the Name dialog. Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 35 In the Name dialog. enter 80mm. For Frame Height Bottom. for Insertion Depth. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. click Family Types. enter 60mm. enter 50mm. For Wall Offset. 36 Under Family Types. enter 100mm. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. click New. 34 Under Family Types. enter 80mm. enter 50mm. click New. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. A family type manages type parameters only. enter 50mm. For Frame Width. enter 80mm. Under Other. enter 100mm. For Frame Width. for Wall Offset Top. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Height. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. Under Dimensions. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. For Width.

For Frame Height Bottom. Right. enter 1400mm. click (Align). Under Dimensions. Under Other. NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. enter 1500mm. Head. for Height. enter 80mm. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. for Frame Depth.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. Center Post Left. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. Frame Right. click (Plane). enter 120mm. click . Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar. 42 In the Work Plane dialog. Frame Bottom. 44 On the Options Bar. Center Post Right. 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. 45 On the Tools toolbar. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 70mm. Frame Top. Frame Left. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. For Width. and click OK. For Center Post Width. Sill. enter 120mm. under Specify a new Work Plane. one on the right. 40 Under Name. and click OK. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Frame Bottom. for Name. 39 Click Apply. 43 On the Design Bar. NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes.

and lock the alignment. . Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. 57 On the View Control Bar. clear Plan/RCP. click Finish Sketch. click (3D). double-click Ref. click Edit. 56 Click OK twice. 49 On the Tools toolbar. Level. Under Detail Levels. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. and lock the alignment.47 On the Design Bar. select Frame/Mullion. The window frame is complete. 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Floor Plans. 52 On the Views toolbar. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 48 In the Project Browser. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial. clear Coarse. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 51 Click Modify. For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides.

5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. Level. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. and click OK. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . click Family Types. 2 On the View Control Bar. 59 In the Family Types dialog. click Scale ➤ 1:10. 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. you model each sash separately. under Floor Plans. and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . For Identity Data ➤ Name. Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. 3 On the Views toolbar. double-click Ref. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. and click Apply. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. enter Sash Left Left. However. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. under Name.

enter Sash Bottom. select Not a Reference. select Construction. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 15 Click Modify. 16 Select the reference plane. 7 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. under Elevations. on the Options Bar. specify each dimension as 50mm. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. for Label. working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. For Other ➤ Is Reference. For Group parameter under. Click OK.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. click Dimension. Click OK. select Not a Reference. 11 Select the next dimension. Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the left dimension. for Label. select Sash Width. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. Click OK. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. 12 Using the same method. For Identity Data ➤ Name. enter Sash Width. select Add Parameter. double-click Exterior.

19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. click . create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. click Family Types. 30 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. enter 50mm. 23 While pressing CTRL. 21 Using the same method. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. 25 For Name. Before you model the sash geometry. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. select both dimensions. 26 Under Construction. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. click (Align). for Sash Width. enter 50mm. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . 31 On the Tools toolbar. Specify it as Not a Reference. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. select Sash Width. for the temporary dimension. 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane. on the Options Bar. 27 Click Apply. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. enter 70mm. for Label. for the temporary dimension. The skeleton of the window sash is complete. 28 For Name.

for Extents ➤ View Range. 34 In the Project Browser. click (3D). click Finish Sketch.NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. and lock the alignment. and lock the alignment. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. 41 Using the same method. Center Post Right. enter 1500. for Cut plane ➤ Offset. Sash Right Right. under Floor Plans. 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. Sash Right Left. Sash Top. click Edit. Frame Right. 37 In the View Range dialog. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. 38 On the Tools toolbar. 42 Switch back to the Ref. Level. and click OK twice. 43 On the Views toolbar. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Sash Bottom. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click Ref. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). 40 Click Modify. Frame Bottom.

For Graphics ➤ Visibility. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . 6 Using the same method. enter Sash Right. select the 2 extrusions. create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. 5 Click OK 3 times. select Frame/Mullion. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. for Graphics ➤ Visible. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash. click the rectangular button on the right side. click Edit. clear Plan/RCP. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 . click Add parameter. Under Detail Levels. select Construction. 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. clear Coarse. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. click Family Types. For Group Parameter under. and click . 47 Click OK twice. 2 In the Element Properties dialog.44 While pressing CTRL. 7 On the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. and Glass Axis Horizontal. select Not a Reference. 10 Under Construction. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. enter Glass Axis. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. not aligned to reference planes.Test the family 8 For Name. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. dimension the Insertion Edge. clear Sash Left. 1 In the Project Browser. Glass Axis Left. and Frame Interior reference planes. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. Glass Axis. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 8 In the Project Browser. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. and name them Glass Axis Right. double-click Exterior. click Dimension. and click OK. 3 Select the reference plane. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. and click Apply. Level. 6 Using one dimension string. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. Click OK. double-click Ref. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 5 On the Design Bar.

select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. 4 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click (Plane). for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family. 2 In the Work Plane dialog. You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 . Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click .10 For each of the new reference planes. This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown.

on the Options Bar. 8 Using the same method. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch. select Add Parameter. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. dimension the left edge of the sketch. 13 Using the same method. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select the dimension line and. and the right edge of the sketch. enter Glass Length Right. For Group Parameter under. 7 Click EQ. dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. for Label. 6 Using one dimension string. click Dimension. Click OK. and create a Glass Height Right parameter. select Other.

21 On the Views toolbar. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry. 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . enter -10.0.0. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right. click (3D). enter 10. Under Detail Levels. select Glass.14 On the Design Bar. 18 Click OK twice. click Edit. clear Plan/RCP. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. clear Coarse. click Finish Sketch. create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. For Extrusion Start.

However. The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters. Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families . as it will minimize performance hits. you should do it. if you can build your family without using formulas. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box.used to control families in many ways. where all of the parameters for a family are listed. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges. set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000.22 On the View Control Bar.

5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane. For Type of Parameter. 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes. 8' ) ) ) IF .(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>.AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. 4 Click Modify. click Add. 8 . For Group parameter under. click Family Types. click Dimension. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. <result-if-true>. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 3 ) Simple IF . 9 In the Family Types dialog. select Dimensions. This would overconstrain the family. 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. B = 3 ) . for Label. 8 On the Design Bar. 8 . 3' .OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 . <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' ."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) . enter Width Sash Left. 2'-6". select Add Parameter. enter Width Sash Right. 6 Select the dimension. 5' . IF ( Length < 45' . on the Options Bar. 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 8 . for the temporary dimension. 3'-0" ) Simple IF . IF ( Length < 55' . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . enter 1000. Level. Click OK. under Parameters. y = 2).11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . select Length.6. 2' 6" .

Frame Height Bottom . enter 400. (Width Sash Left . the new value is 880. Height . Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Family Types dialog. (Width Sash Right . enter 1200. The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200.2 * Sash Width). The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. and press ENTER. the new value is 560. Test the family 13 Under Name. Frame Width. and Center Post Width. Width Sash Right). click Family Types. select Dimensions. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. The value is greyed out.Width Sash Left) . enter if(Sash Left. and click OK. In the Formula row for Glass Height Left.2 * Sash Width). The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200.Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. (Height .Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom . enter formulas: ■ Under Other. Height .Frame Height Top .Frame Height Bottom). 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width . (Height .(Frame Width * 2) . enter if(Sash Right. Width Sash Left). In the Formula row for Glass Height Right. and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog. ■ Click Apply. 17 For Name. 11 In the Family Types dialog. ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK.■ ■ For Group Parameter under. ■ Click Apply.Frame Height Top . and press ENTER.Frame Height Top .2 * Sash Width). 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. Click OK.2 * Sash Width).Frame Height Bottom). in the Formula row for Glass Length Right. 15 For Name. 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. enter if(Sash Right. Width Sash Left. enter if(Sash Left. In the Formula row for Glass Length Left. for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula.

note the Elevation Swing subcategory. under Elevations. double-click Exterior. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. 10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. 9 On the Options Bar.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. click (Plane). click Symbolic Lines. They should be placed on a selected subcategory. for Name. 3 Click OK. select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. select Elevation Swing [projection]. 5 On the Tools toolbar. 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. under Category. 4 In the Project Browser. 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. and lock all alignment constraints. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . under Specify a new Work Plane. clear Chain. expand Windows.

5 In the Materials dialog. 6 In the Material Library dialog. for Visible. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. under AccuRender. and click OK three times. 4 In the New Material dialog. click . and click OK. select the rectangular button on the right side. and click Duplicate. select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. and glass. 16 Click OK twice. click in the Material column. select Default. and on the Options Bar. and click . 3 In the Materials dialog. When you assign default materials in a family. and click the button on the right side of the column. and select Whites. select all symbolic lines. clear Coarse. you create material parameters for the frame. under Detail Levels. under Category. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter.11 In the drawing area. If the subcategory already exists in the project. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. 15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 7 Select Cool. for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. sash. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. select Sash Right. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. Next. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. while pressing CTRL.Matte. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family. unless the default value is < By Category >. 18 Save the file. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. under Graphics. 13 While pressing CTRL. 17 Using the same method. click Visibility. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. enter Window Frame. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. for Name. for Name. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project.

you can switch between imported families of the same category. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. which nests them. double-click Ref. You can override it on a type level. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 Click OK. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. a Depth instance parameter. The default value is By Category. Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Add parameter. click (3D). Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family. In this lesson. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. 10 Save the file. Level.1 On the Views toolbar. Using family type parameters in the main family. 7 Using the same method. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion. under Floor Plans. click the rectangular button on the right side. Creating Nested Families | 575 . and click Open. Open the families and explore the design of them. select Materials and Finishes. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. 6 Click OK three times. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. If this parameter is defined as shared. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. When the family is loaded into a project. create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. a Width type parameter. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. 4 In the Project Browser. . Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. click Family Types. enter Frame. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. For Group parameter under.rfa.

7 Select the solid geometry. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. and click . 12 Select the solid geometry. The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. double-click View 1. and is visible only in detail level Fine.5 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. double-click Left. The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family. The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. and click Open. under Elevations. under 3D views. has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 In the Project Browser.rfa. 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click . 10 Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 Click OK.

Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family. 2 In the Open dialog. 3 Using the same method. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 . and is visible only in detail level Fine. select Casement Window. Parameters. click Load into Projects. and verify that m_Metal Sill. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. select Casement Window. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. You open the main family first. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile.rfa -3D View: View1. Reference Planes. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rfa. open m_Concrete Sill. and then load families into the casement window family you have created.rfa is cleared. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 On the Design Bar.rfa is cleared. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. 10 Click OK. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family.rfa. and click Open. navigate to Casement Window. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. click Load into Projects.rfa.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. and verify thatm_Concrete Sill.rfa. 13 Click OK. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family. 6 Click OK.

For Type of Parameter. 2 In the Family Types dialog. For Group parameter under. select Construction. for Construction ➤ Sill Length. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.rfa. Click OK.rfa. enter Sill Length. click Add. they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. 578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Maximize Casement Window. in the Formula column. select Length. click Family Types. under Parameters. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill. Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar. As both sill families have been defined as Window families. enter Width . 5 Click OK. double-click Concrete Sill.2* Wall Offset. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family.

and lock the alignment. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. click the rectangular button on the right side. select Insertion Depth. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 9 Click OK twice. for Dimensions ➤ Width. 9 Click OK twice. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. and click . Level. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. for Dimensions ➤ Length. double-click Ref. Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. click (Align). 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click the rectangular button on the right side. select Sill Length. 3 In the Project Browser. you place the concrete sill in the project.7 In the Type Properties dialog. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. 2 On the View Control Bar. The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. Placing the Sill Family | 579 . 11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. 5 Click Modify. 10 Using the same method. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog.

and lock the alignment. click (Align). click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 14 On the View Control Bar. 17 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1.12 Using the same method. double-click Left. 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. 15 On the Tools toolbar. click and spin the wall. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level. you add a Sill Type parameter. align the bottom edge of the sill family. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar. The sill is placed in the desired position. TIP If the sill does not display. under Elevations. and lock the alignment. 13 In the Project Browser.

Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 3 Click Apply. 16 Click OK twice. under Parameter Type. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). select Sill Type. Under Type of Parameter.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. click Create. click New. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. click Family Types. and select Instance. 10 Click OK 3 times. navigate to Training. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. click Family Types. enter Sill Type. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. for Name. select Constraints. under Groups. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. select <Family Type>. 2 In the Family Types dialog. select Metal Sill. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. 18 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter Windows. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. Testing Nested Families | 581 . click OK. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. for Label. select Windows. click Shared parameter. click New. under Parameters. 4 Under File name. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. and click Save. If the family is then loaded into a project. enter Training Shared Parameter. 3 In the Save As dialog. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Select Category dialog. for Group parameter under. under Parameters. and click Select. click Add. select the Concrete Sill family.

3 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Views toolbar. 9 In the View Control Bar.rfa -3D View: View 1. click the Wall tool. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar. This creates a new project with the default template. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window. click Load into Projects. click and spin the wall. insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall.4 Click OK. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. and create a horizontal wall. check all views at all levels of detail. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 In the Type Selector. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 7 Using the same method. TIP If the sill does not display. click the Window tool. 5 On the Design Bar. click (3D). 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click .

13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . Width. and click . Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson.10 Select the smaller window. enter Window Schedule with Sills. add the fields Mark. and click OK. Click OK. and drawers as extrusions. drawer base. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. Under Name. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog. rolltop. select Windows. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. Note that the window sill has changed. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. select Metal Sill. Height. Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. You begin by creating the desktop.

and specify values for the furniture length and depth. click Ref Plane. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family.rft. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 4 Maximize the view. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 5 On the View menu. their exact location is not critical. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown.Finally. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. click New ➤ Family. Floor Plan: Ref. click Training Files. 2 On the File menu. Level. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes.

8 Draw two vertical reference planes. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. click Dimension. and ending at the right reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . 10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. as shown. Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar.

12 On the Design Bar. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added.Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal. 13 Select the left reference plane. click Modify. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown.

17 To the right of the dimension you just created. and ending at the lower reference plane. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . click Dimension. as shown. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. as shown.

18 On the Design Bar. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. horizontal reference plane. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. Afterwards. 19 Select the upper. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP To do this. click Modify.

select <Add parameter. Select Type. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 24 On the Options Bar.. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. select Family parameter. select Dimensions.. Click OK.> for Label. select <Add parameter.> for Label. 27 On the Options Bar. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog.. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. For Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. enter Length for Name.Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. select Family parameter..

enter Depth for Name. Select Type. 31 In the Family Types dialog. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters.■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Therefore. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. 30 On the Design Bar. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click OK. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. so when you open the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select Dimensions. click Family Types. you can still see the model. enter 3000 mm for Length. For Group parameter under. Click Apply. it will also adapt to the same changes.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Symbolic Lines. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 7 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. click . 8 On the Options Bar. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Level for Name. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. enter 2000 mm for Length. Click Apply. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. click . NOTE In the image below. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click OK. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click to select all four symbolic lines. click Set Work Plane. Click OK.32 In the Family Types dialog. select Level: Ref. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591. and enter 100 mm for Depth. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. under Specify a new Work Plane. Your lines may have a lighter weight.

Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. and select the top edge. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop.10 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. double-click Front. 11 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. click Modify. and select the bottom edge. click Dimension.

enter Height for Name. select Dimensions.. click Modify..18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. For Group parameter under. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Click OK. select Family parameter. 22 On the Options Bar. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. select <Add parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Dimensions. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. Select Type. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension.> for Label. enter Thickness for Name. 25 On the Options Bar. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . click Modify. Select Type. select <Add parameter. 27 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data.> for Label. For Group parameter under.. as shown.. Click OK. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge.

click . and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. you can still see the model. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. click Ref Plane. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and enter 100 mm for Offset. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. under Floor Plans. Enter 750 mm for Height. enter 4000 mm for Length. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. 594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Level. Click OK.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. Click Apply. 31 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 30 In the Family Types dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. 29 On the Design Bar. so when you open the Family Types dialog. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. double-click Ref. and click Apply. and click Apply. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. and click Apply. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types.

5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Click the lock icon as shown. click Dimension. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 . 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. 6 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimension as shown.

select Level: Ref. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle.Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. click . as shown. and click OK. Level for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. After you complete the rectangle. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. 13 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 10 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Set Work Plane. click Lines. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. two lock icons display. 11 In the Work Plane dialog.

Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 20 On the Tools toolbar. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. click the Mirror tool. using the TAB key. 19 Select the four sketched lines. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension.16 On the Design Bar. You can also highlight the entire line chain. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . .

select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 23 For the align-to reference. as shown below at the cursor.A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 22 On the Tools toolbar. 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click .

click Dimension. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 26 On the Design Bar.A lock icon displays. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 .

Click OK. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. as shown. 30 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select Type. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. select <Add parameter.. select Family parameter.> for Label.. Under Parameter Data.28 Add two final dimensions. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. select Dimensions. For Group parameter under.

34 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . under Elevations. 35 On the Design Bar. 33 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Tools toolbar. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. click .32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. double-click Front. click Finish Sketch. select Drawer Base Width for Label.

click Visibility/Graphics.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. 42 On the View menu. 45 On the View Control Bar. 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click OK. notice that annotations display in this view. However. 40 On the Design Bar. After the alignment. click . The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. a lock icon displays. 41 On the View toolbar. click it to lock the alignment. you can still see the model. click Modify. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. click the Scale control and select 1:20. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog.

enter 2000 mm for Length. double-click Right. 48 In the Family Types dialog. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. Enter 1200 mm for Height. enter 4000 mm for Length. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 49 In the Family Types dialog. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.47 On the Design Bar. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. and click Apply. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. under Elevations. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. Click OK. Click Apply. and click Apply. and click Apply.

7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. click . 4 In the Work Plane dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Set Work Plane. then the lower horizontal sketch line. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines.2 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the upper left corner. 5 On the Design Bar. as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 Select the desk top. click . and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 3 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 On the Tools toolbar.

11 On the Design Bar. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 . 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. and lock it.10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. click Dimension. and lock it. then select the right parallel sketch line. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. and lock the alignment.

the upper sketch line. click the Fillet arc tool. 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Lines. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. . click Finish Sketch. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius.13 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. 16 On the Design Bar. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. 14 On the Options Bar.

double-click Front. select the right edge of the rolltop. under Elevations. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. click . 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 . and click the lock icon. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. select the left edge of the rolltop.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. and click the lock icon.

click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Height. You can also use dimension constraints. The desk should adapt to all the changes. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 23 On the Design Bar. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. click . The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. and click Apply. and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. you can still see the model. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 In the Family Types dialog.21 On the View toolbar. If not. and click Apply.

under Specify a new Work Plane. Click Apply. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. Enter 750 mm for Height. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Set Work Plane. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Work Plane dialog.25 In the Family Types dialog. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk. and click OK. enter 2000 mm for Length.

click Dimension. under Elevations. click Lines. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. click . click . If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. 12 On the Options Bar. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . zoom the view until you do.5 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Tools toolbar. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. . Lock each dimension as you add it. 6 On the Design Bar. select Multiple Alignment. 7 On the Options Bar. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. There should be four dimensions as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. click drawer set on the left. 11 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Front. After selecting the line of an upper drawer. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first.

Cherry. click Duplicate. 26 In the Materials dialog. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. click 24 In the Materials dialog. click Modify. click . 16 On the Design Bar. click . click the Model Graphics Style control. 28 Click OK.15 On the Tools toolbar. 22 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 19 On the Design Bar. click OK. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 31 On the View Control Bar. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. under AccuRender. and click OK. click Extrusion Properties. under Constraints. click . 17 On the Design Bar. click OK.Wood. for Material. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 In the New Material dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and select Shading with Edges. Polished. Dark. click for Texture. enter Desk . 20 On the View toolbar. 27 In the Material Library dialog.

If not. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. Enter 750 mm for Height. Click OK. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 2000 mm for Length. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612. Click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. 35 In the Family Types dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. You can also use dimension constraints. and click Apply. 34 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. and click Apply. click Family Types. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. The desk should adapt to all the changes. you can still see the model. enter 4000 mm for Length.

and click Apply. click 14 On the View toolbar. 10 In the Family Types dialog.rfa file. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Training Furniture. 8 Under Family Types. 6 In the Name dialog. 18 In the Open dialog. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. click Family Types. 3 In the Name dialog. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. click . and click Apply. 15 On the View Control Bar.rfa. and click Open. 17 On the Options Bar. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth. 11 On the File menu. click Apply. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. click Component. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. and click OK. click New. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. select it. to start a new project based on your default template. 4 In the Family Types dialog. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. under Family Types. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . and click OK. click New. 19 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Load. 5 Under Family Types. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. 7 In the Family Types dialog. click Save. click New.

This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. and click to add the third desk. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm.21 In the Type Selector. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. 23 In the Type Selector. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and add the second desk. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype.

5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. However. expand Views (all). the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Drawing a Baluster | 615 . The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. 2 On the View menu. select Ref. 6 In the Work Plane dialog.rft. their exact location is not critical. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. and click OK. click Training Files. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. click Lines. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. click Finish Sketch. 4 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Level for Name. and double-click Ref. expand Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar. Level. click Set Work Plane. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.

11 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 14 Click the lock icon. click Stairs.rte. click . click Modify and select the extrusion.rfa. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog. 6 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 4 On the Design Bar. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. 7 On the File menu. click the Modelling tab. click New ➤ Project. the extrusion has a height of 250mm. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar.Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. double-click Front. By default. 12 On the Options Bar. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. The new custom baluster is now complete. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Finish Sketch.

under Baluster Family. 11 On the View menu. click . 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Shading with Edges. 21 In the Element Properties dialog.8 In the Open dialog. click OK. click OK. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters. click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 On the View toolbar. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file. 19 Click OK. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 10 On the View menu. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. 13 On the Options Bar. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . click Modify and select the existing railing. click . and click Open. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. click Orient ➤ Southwest. select it. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog.

The new sweep profile is now complete. you create a rail profile. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. a railing. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. click Training Files. click New ➤ Family.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. balusters. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and other sweep-defined objects. However. you create five different profiles: a sweep. and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall. In this lesson. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. a stair nosing. click Lines. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection.rft. their exact location is not critical. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. a reveal. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. cornices. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . soffits. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog.Sweep. you draw a sweep profile. In the left pane of the New dialog. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise.rft. under Floor Plans. Level is open. click Training Files.rfa. verify that Ref.

click Lines. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise.rft. their exact location is not critical. The new rail profile is now complete. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. click Training Files.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a stair nosing profile. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface.Rail. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. However. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 . Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar.rfa. click New ➤ Family.

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. click New ➤ Family.rfa. under Floor Plans.Stair Nosing. Level is open. their exact location is not critical. However. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown. In addition. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rft. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. you create a reveal profile. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In the left pane of the New dialog. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. click Training Files. verify that Ref. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. click Lines.

the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane).rft. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. However. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.Reveal. The new reveal profile is now complete. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. you create a host sweep profile. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. which may be any vertical surface.rfa. Level is open. click New ➤ Family. under Floor Plans.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Training Files. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. click Lines. their exact location is not critical. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. verify that Ref.

The new host sweep profile is now complete. click Training Files. their exact location is not critical. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. click Create. click Lines. 2 In the New Project dialog. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. click Browse.rfa. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane).rte. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise.Host Sweep.The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. However. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. click New ➤ Project. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . 16 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. 13 In the Open dialog. select Generic Models for Family Category. click Ref Plane. 11 On the Design Bar. beside Load Profiles.Sweep. 14 In the Type Selector. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. click Finish Sweep. Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser.Sweep. 15 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 7 In the Name dialog. click . expand Elevations. navigate to the location of Profile . click Finish Family. select Profile . and double-click South. 9 On the Design Bar. click Load Profiles. expand Views (all). click Sketch 2D Path. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. click Finish Path. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar.rfa. select it. and click OK. the exact location of the path is not critical. enter Sweep for Name. 10 On the Design Bar. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the View toolbar. and click Open. and click OK.

23 Select the sweep profile again and. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click New ➤ Project. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.rte.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. select Profile Is Flipped. 26 On the Design Bar. click Wall. The sweep profile application is now complete. click . on the Options Bar. click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 25 Click OK. Under Constraints. 27 On the View toolbar. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise. click Training Files. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. click Finish Family. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Edit. Under Other. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 In the New Project dialog. click OK. click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Select the sweep profile and. on the Options Bar.

7 On the View toolbar. 6 Draw four walls as shown. click . 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. verify that Horizontal is selected. 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep.NOTE When you draw the walls. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . 9 On the Options Bar. their exact location is not critical.

Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. you specify the room tag parameters. you create a room tag which displays room name. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.Host Sweep : Profile . 14 In the Open dialog.rft. and click Open. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. 19 On the View toolbar. on the Options Bar. click Training Files.Host Sweep. navigate to the location of Profile .rfa. and click OK. select Profile . click . The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.12 On the Design Bar. 15 Select the wall sweep and. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. In the left pane of the New dialog. click Spin [Shift]. click OK. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. floor and ceiling finish. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. click Edit/New. select it. and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag.Host Sweep for Profile. and area with labels added to extract project data. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Modify. under Construction. . Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.

select Floor Finish. click Label. and click OK. 8 In the Name dialog. select Label : 2mm. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. click Label. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click OK. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. and click OK. 3 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Selector. 17 In the Type Selector. select Ceiling Finish. select Name. select Area. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter 2mm for Name. click Edit/New. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog. 16 Zoom in on the label. select Underline. click . The name label is displayed with the text underlined. and click OK. clear Underline. 7 In the Type properties dialog. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK.

click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. The new room tag is now ready for use. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. notice that there is only one view available. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rft. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. click Training Files. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project.rfa. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. 3 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. click Lines. click . In the left pane of the New dialog. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser.

click Modify. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 . 10 On the Design Bar.5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. 6 On the Options Bar. click . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle.

and select the upper vertical line. click New ➤ Project. select A1 metric. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. 4 In the New Project dialog. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click New. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. in the North Line row. click Modify. select 3 for Line Weight. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. click Training Files. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project.rfa. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. 7 Click OK. 17 On the Design Bar. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. select North Line. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. 16 In the Type Selector. enter North Line for Name. click Modify. 12 In the Object Styles dialog. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog. 9 On the File menu. click Browse. click Object Styles. and click OK. Training North Arrow. click OK. under Modify Subcategories. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Sheet. and click OK. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise.

select Training North Arrow. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 12 In the Type Selector. text. and your project data. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. In the left pane of the New dialog. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. and labels. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow.10 In the Open dialog. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. click New ➤ Titleblock. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. 14 On the Design Bar. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 .rft. and click Open. select it. click Symbol. The titleblock has linework. click Modify. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise.rfa. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. graphics. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.

click . 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new vertical line. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and enter 140 for Offset. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and click . . 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. and enter -25 for Offset. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. click .

click Modify. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 13 In the Type Selector. click Lines. click Modify. and enter 20 for Offset. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. click . and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line.12 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. select Title Blocks. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. select Wide Lines. 25 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 17 On the Options Bar. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . enter 30 for Offset. press CTRL. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 21 On the Options Bar.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu.jpg. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. click . click Training Files. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 4 Zoom in on the logo. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. 6 On the Options Bar. and labels to your titleblock. and open Common\Company Logo. you add a company logo. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. click Import/Link ➤ Image. text notes. click Duplicate. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .The titleblock linework is now complete.

and click OK. 11 Click OK twice. and select the last text note. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. enter 10mm Bold for Name. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . 18 Select the drag handle. under Text. in the text box. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. enter 10 for Text Size. and add an address and phone number as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and select Bold. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and drag the text note down as shown. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. select Text : 8mm.9 In the Name dialog.

and select the consultant text note. address. 636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Edit toolbar. select Constrain and Multiple. click . click Text. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. Add consultant name.

27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 .

34 Click OK twice. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. under Text. click . 33 In the Type Properties dialog. click Text. and enter Date:. click Edit/New. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 32 In the Name dialog. and enter Drawn By:. click Duplicate. enter 5 for Text Size.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Checked By:. enter 5mm for Name. 29 On the Options Bar. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and enter Sheet Number:. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. and click OK. select Text : 5mm.

44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 41 On the Options Bar. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 . select Project Issue Date. click Label. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field.

click Center and Middle. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click OK. enter 15 for Text Size. 50 On the Options Bar. 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Duplicate. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 53 In the Name dialog. under Text. select Sheet Number. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. select Drawn By. and click to specify the label location. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. and click OK. select Project Number. and click OK. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. click . and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 59 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. enter 15mm Label for Name. select Checked By and click OK. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog. 55 Click OK twice.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. select Label : 15mm Label. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. click Label.

and click OK. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. click Label. select Client Name. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field.62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click to specify the label location. select Project Name. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 . 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. and click to specify the label location.

under Text. 4 In the New Project dialog. enter 4mm Label. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .70 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and labels are now complete. and click to specify the label location. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. and click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. select it. 73 In the Name dialog. 75 Click OK twice. 72 In the Type Properties dialog. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rfa file. 74 In the Type Properties dialog. click . click Training Files. click Browse. 7 In the Open dialog. select 4mm Label. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. click Sheet. 80 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Project.rte. and click OK. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Duplicate. 9 Click OK. click Edit/New.rfa. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. enter 4 for Text Size. click OK. text. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 77 On the Options Bar. The titleblock graphics. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select File Path. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Left and Middle. and click Open. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Load.

2005 for Project Issue Date. 11 On the Options Bar. click Project Information. Enter In Progress for Project Status. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. under Other. and click OK. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the titleblock. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 . 16 Click OK. click . 14 On the Settings menu. enter Name for Drawn By.Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. Enter Office Building for Project Name.

and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. click Project Units. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. To change the units of measurement to meters. you create the dome roof with a revolved form.rvt. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. click Training Files. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. format the Area to use 2 decimal places.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. on the Settings menu. set the Area to Square meters. and set the suffix to None. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. Set the Length units to millimeters. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Orient ➤ Southeast. and open Common\c_Pantheon.

expand Elevations. 5 In the Name dialog. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . select Pick a Plane. 7 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section . 10 In the Go To View dialog. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. and double-click South. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. click Create. select Roofs for Family Category. and click OK. and click OK.Center. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 8 In the Work Plane dialog. enter Dome for Name. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. expand Views (all). 2 In the Project Browser.Next.

15 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. click . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Lines. click .The center wall section view is displayed. click Axis.

Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.17 Move the cursor out. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. and select Chain. click . 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown.

Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. click . 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. select Delete Inner Segment. click Lines. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. 27 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click .

and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. click Lines. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. click and select Chain. Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. click . 32 On the Options Bar.

650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. select Concrete . under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Sketch. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. 40 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Materials dialog. click Create.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click for Material. click Finish Family. select Floors for Family Category. click OK. 42 On the View toolbar. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. click Revolution Properties.The dome roof closed profile is now complete. and click OK.

enter Concave Floor for Name.Center. 6 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section .3 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Go To View dialog. 7 In the Work Plane dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 . and click Open View. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. click Axis. double-click South. and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click Set Work Plane. click . and click OK.

652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 On the Options Bar. click . click Lines. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. 15 Specify the intersection of the T.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar.O. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. and select Chain. Footing level line and the axis. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm.

double-click 3D Section View. Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 24 On the Design Bar. the new family has specific default contents. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. click Revolution Properties.18 Specify the intersection of the T. select Cobblestone for Name.Exploring Family Templates | 653 . you start with the selection of a family template. and title blocks.O. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click OK. annotation families.O. click Finish Family. Appendix A . Appendix A . such as reference planes and sub-categories. Based on the template you select. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. click for Material. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 25 On the Design Bar. When you create a new family. 22 In the Materials dialog. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. The concave floor closed profile is now complete.

654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Post Family template for posts of balusters.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views.Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates. Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *. Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: None Baluster .

Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family.Template Name *. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family. is used to create 2D detail components. If a column intersects a wall. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Includes the filled region tool. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 . contains a reference line and left and right reference planes.rft Description Column Family template to create columns. includes the filled region tool. the column inherits the material of the wall. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls.

Template Name *.Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls. Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project. Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors. Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families.rft Door . 656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families.rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families. Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families. Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 . Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.Template Name *.

Contains sample floor geometry.Template Name *. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project. Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry.

Includes the filled region tool. Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes.Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains sample roof geometry. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Model Family Templates | 659 . Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.

Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Contains sample roof geometry.Template Name *. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Contains sample floor geometry. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project.

Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 . The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *.rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures. Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project. Contains sample wall geometry. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based.

rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project. gross surface area. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. Masses can report gross volume.Template Name *. and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces. and gross floor areas. Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls. Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families. slabs. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Contains sample wall geometry.

Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families. Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Contains sample wall geometry.Template Name *. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 .rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families.

A profile is only used in combination with system families. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Category: Profiles.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. slab edge. wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. gutter. Category: Profiles. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals. Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. mullion. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned.Template Name *. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. Category: Profiles. Profile usage (fascia. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Category: Profiles.

Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families.Template Name *. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. Category: Profiles. A profile is used only in combination with system families. Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families.rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 . The family has an rpc file link included.

Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. such as beams and braces. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families. Beams can be placed on structural columns. Spot Lighting Fixture roof based. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column. the column cuts out the wall. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based. specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. If a structural column intersects a wall. A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete.rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based.Template Name *.

Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families. Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side. Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 .Template Name *.rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing .Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls. such as trusses. Category: Structural Framing Window .

0mm has a size of 2. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.Template Name *.0mm on a plotted sheet. parameter text created with a text height of 2. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads. Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. text. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag.rft Window Description Family template for windows. and parameters. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. Annotation families consist mainly of lines. text size.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout. Symbol size. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads. Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. Annotation families are scale-dependent. Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. filled regions. Thus. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

You import images to your title block. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes. Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.rft ■ B .rft ■ New Site Metric.rft ■ C .36 x 24.rft ■ A1 metric. and parameters. In a project. Imperial ■ A .rft ■ A3 metric.rft ■ A4 metric.17 x 11.rft ■ D .11 x 8.24 x 18. Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks. all loaded title block families are listed for selection. filled regions. text. In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border.rft Metric ■ A0 metric.rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 . the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.rft ■ E1 .Template Name *.42 x 30.rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet.5.rft ■ A2 metric.

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

In this case. At the end of this tutorial. The truss also has multiple types. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. In exercises that become increasingly complex. assigned subcatecories. During this tutorial. 671 . you will understand the process. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. not specifically how to make a floor truss. formula-based parameters. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. methodology.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. and detail level controls. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords.

there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. it is not the best solution. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. Take this into consideration during your design planning. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. Two types should be created. In this case. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. NOTE When creating a new family. and also works intuitively with them. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. this must be a structural beam component. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. For every complexity added to a family. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. and structural walls. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. It should also be an available option within a beam system. For training purposes. beams. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. In this lesson. Although this solution is possible. you determine the requirements of the new component. a generic floor-based component might work. In the next exercise. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. In this case. In addition. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. you should avoid over-designing the component. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. Selecting the Family Template | 673 . the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. such as wood type.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. In the previous exercise. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. 4 Continue with the next exercise. the planning stage and questions may differ. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. These materials can be applied using Object Styles. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. would require Instance or Type parameters. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. Depending on the family you are designing. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. In addition.

5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. scroll to the structural framing templates. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. Like most generic family templates. click Training Files.Beams and Braces. 4 Scroll through the various template options. 6 In the New dialog. On the right side of the New dialog. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. for example: wall based or floor based. However. this is where you access family templates. There are two structural framing templates provided. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.rft. and open Metric\Templates. Usually.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). You should be in the Metric Templates folder. In addition. Select it so that the preview displays. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. notice the preview. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. you will access them from the Training Files folder. ■ Metric Structural Framing .

Level. ■ Metric Structural Framing .rft. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing . 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 .rft and notice the preview. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing . Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane.Complex and Trusses. spacing. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. Because of its simplicity.Complex and Trusses. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). and notice the preview. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. This template is the best starting point for the new family.Beams and Braces. 10 Maximize the view. Floor Plan: Ref. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. Floor Plan: Ref.Beams and Braces.rft to open it.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. and display functions required by structural beams.This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping.

This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. you add reference planes to the beam design. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. however. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. lines. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. Reference Plane: Left. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. 11 In the Project Browser. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Elevations. Level. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. 12 In the Project Browser. you add the reference planes. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676. under Floor Plans. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. double-click View 1. double-click Front. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. Therefore. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. double-click Ref. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. under 3D Views. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. Like many templates.In this view.

In the project plan view image below. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. In the image below. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. notice the location of the beam extents. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project.

8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click . Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. 678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes.These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). In a later exercise. Before adding new reference planes. click Ref Plane.

Add ref. 13 On the Design Bar. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. To do this. under Elevations. Level. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. click Ref Plane. These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. Level. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. Level as the mirror axis. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . and select the Level: Ref. double-click Front. 10 On the Design Bar. click on the Edit toolbar. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. select the lower horizontal reference plane. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. click to place it. click Ref Plane. click . 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane.

You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. specify an Offset of 200 mm. click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. click to place it as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. Before you move on to the next exercise. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right.

24 In the Project Browser. click to place it as shown. under Floor Plans. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. click to place it as shown. double-click Ref. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. which you do in the next exercise. Adding Reference Planes | 681 . cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. Level. 22 On the Options Bar.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. specify an Offset of 238 mm.

25 On the Design Bar. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. 28 In the Save As dialog. Make sure you remember where you saved it. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682. click Modify. navigate to the folder of your choice. 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. and click Save. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. In the following exercise. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below.

2 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. Wood Floor Truss. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. and click the EQ symbol when it displays.rfa. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click . click Dimension. 6 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. After adding the dimension. 4 On the Design Bar. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. click Dimension.

684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. the Center reference plane. place the dimension to the left as shown. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. click Dimension. Place the dimension as shown. double-click Front. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. Level. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. and the lower horizontal reference plane. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref.

These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. add two dimensions as shown. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 . 15 Add four dimensions as shown. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. and place it below the dimension you added previously. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model.

You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. Throughout the tutorial. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. Level. If the component has material that varies per component. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. consider making it a type parameter. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. Wood Floor Truss. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. and constraints as needed. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you will add additional reference planes. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. consider making it an instance parameter. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. dimensions. it becomes a parameter.rfa. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. under Floor Plans. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. In the next exercise. When you design a new family. In addition. In this exercise. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. consider making it a type parameter. double-click Ref. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design.

select Add parameter for Label. select Family parameter. ■ Click OK. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 . 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. Under Parameter Data. 7 On the Options Bar. enter Chord Width for Name. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. under Elevations.3 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Select Type. Select Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. double-click Front. enter Depth for Name. Click OK. select Add parameter for Label.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

under Floor Plans. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. This project consists of foundation walls. 6 Using point-to-point insertion.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. double-click Level 1. 4 In the Type Selector. a slab. and double-click 3D . and a wood rim joist. and click Structural. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 . The rim joist was added as a beam. 2 In the Project Browser. a wood sill. click Beam. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end.Southeast Isometric. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active. verify that Chain is not selected. expand 3D Views. expand Views. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. therefore.

not the wall or rim joist. 7 In the Project Browser. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. double-click Level 1. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D . 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. 710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .Southeast Isometric. You do not need to be precise. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown.NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams.

The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 .Southeast Isometric. This should return the project to its original dimension. In the next lesson. under 3D Views. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. 13 In the Save as dialog. double-click 3D . 11 On the Edit menu. click Undo Drag. Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. click Save as. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. 12 On the File menu. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name.10 In the Project Browser.

Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. click Yes. click Edit Family. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques .rfa is the active file. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. and click Hide Element. click Hide/Isolate. under Floor Plans. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. click Training Files.rfa. 2 In the Project Browser. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. 4 On the View Control Bar. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. 5 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. 15 On the Options Bar.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. double-click Ref. Because the family is already open. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Level.

11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . click Modify. click Component. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. This will make aligning the wood web easier. under Elevations. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. 13 For the align-to point. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. You will align the left web component first. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. double-click Front. 10 In the Project Browser. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. In the following steps. 7 In the Type Selector. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. Do not select it. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss.This family is a single extrusion as shown. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. 9 On the Design Bar. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected.

IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Modify. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. click Ref Plane. In addition. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. 16 On the Design Bar. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components.

19 On the Tools menu. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . click Align. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. In the steps that follow. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.

click Modify. 28 In the Save As dialog. you add new parameters to control the web components. or the width of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown. 26 On the Design Bar. click Save As. ■ In the next exercise. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. length. click Family Types.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. click Add. 2 In the Family Types dialog. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. you label these dimensions. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. 27 On the File menu.

3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. click Modify. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. 12 On the Design Bar. click OK. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Click OK. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . and click OK. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. 5 Click OK. under Parameter Data. In addition. Select Common for Discipline. select WebDepth. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. click OK. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. 4 In the Family Types dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. enter Depth . In the Type Properties dialog. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. under Constraints. and click Element Properties. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. under Other. Select Length for Type.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. Select Type.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

13 In the Load into Projects dialog. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. select m_WWF3. 286. and click OK. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. click Family Types. if(Length < 9000. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 . click Edit Family. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. <result-if-true>. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions. select 64x38. if(Length < 7500. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. 18 In the Type Selector.rvt. select 89x38. 350. select Override parameter values of existing types. under 3D Views. and click Yes. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. 20 On the Design Bar. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space.Southeast Isometric. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 22 On the File menu. click Beam. click Load into Projects. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. 21 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. 2 On the Options Bar. 400. click Save. double-click 3D . Notice the two beam types. 400))) 6 Click Apply.

11 In the Reload Family dialog. double-click Level 1. under 3D Views. click Apply. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Save. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. and click Apply. 16 On the File menu. and click OK. 8 In the Family Types dialog. click Load into Projects. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. and click Yes. and click OK. double-click 3D . You have completed this tutorial. select m_WWF3. enter 8000 for length. Notice the truss depth increases.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth.rvt. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change.Southeast Isometric. 17 Close any open files. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. enter 6000 for length. 14 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

panel. you need to select a panel.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. 743 . Like windows. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Unlike windows. and they are not windows. grid lines. you need to change the length of the wall. This affects the entire curtain system. For example. To change grids. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. and mullions. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. To switch panel types. or you can use a specific curtain system command. to resize the system. you select the grid. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. Like walls. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. and you can change these elements individually.

4 In the Type Selector. and double-click Ground Floor. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. click Wall. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. you create a curtain system using the wall command.rvt. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating an Entrance | 745 .6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. enter 1200. 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and room bounding. top and base attachments. Click OK. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. and click (Properties). under Floor Plans. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. double-click GROUND FLOOR. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. For Top Offset. top constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems.11 Select the curtain system. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. using curtain grids.

and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. FIFTH FLOOR. 20 In the drawing area. and click Rename. Creating an Entrance | 747 . 18 In the Project Browser. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. while pressing CTRL. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click OK. click Elevation. 25 On the Design Bar. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. FOURTH FLOOR. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. SIXTH FLOOR. click Curtain Grid. and resize the crop boundary as shown. click Modify. 26 While pressing CTRL. select SECOND FLOOR. and click OK.a. right-click Elevation 1 . THIRD FLOOR. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. and SEVENTH FLOOR.15 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Click to place another grid line.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. click Modify. click Curtain Grid. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. one larger than the other. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 33 On the Design Bar. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels.

Next. and then select the segment above it. The two segments are removed. Creating an Entrance | 749 . 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The segment line style changes to dashed. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. you add a doorway to the curtain system. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Instead of using the Door command. and on the Options Bar. You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. click Add or Remove Segments.

750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. and lock them. 42 Place dimensions as shown.38 Using the same method. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 On the Design Bar. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. select One Segment. click Curtain Grid.

The panel changes to a double door. click Training Files. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click Modify. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 52 On the Type Selector. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 54 On the Design Bar. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels.rfa. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Creating an Entrance | 751 . TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. Use the following image as a guide. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. click in any white space to exit the editor. Next. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.43 Delete the dimensions. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it.

Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. and click Wireframe. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. click . 56 In the Project Browser. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 57 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. This changes the graphics style of the view. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Next. They are part of the curtain panel category. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 61 With the panel still selected. click System Panel : Solid. 65 On the View Control Bar. and the solid panels display in white. 63 Click OK twice. 55 In the Project Browser. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. 60 On the Type Selector. click . on the new curtain system you added. Now.These panels schedule as doors. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. not as curtain panels. The glazed panels display in blue. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . under Elevations. double-click Entrance Elevation.

rvt.66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. select Entire Grid Line. 68 On the File menu. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 . click Save As. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Grid Line Segment. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click Mullion. 2 On the Options Bar. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 4 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise.

12 Click the lower mullion join control. however. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. because their width reduces the size of the doors. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Two mullion join controls display. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 9 Delete the mullions below them. You are going to change some mullion joins.6 On the Options Bar. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. there are a few that you do not want. select All Empty Segments. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. so you remove them next. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar.

You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. you can also right-click. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. Curved Curtain System | 755 . click Modify. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 14 On the Design Bar. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 16 Save the file. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 15 In the Project Browser.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 13 Click the top mullion control. Finally. double-click Southeast Isometric. Finally. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. you add a curtain system using the wall command.

(Arc passing through three points). Click OK. under Floor Plans. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 5 Click . 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. for Top Constraint. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 1200. click Wall. For Top Offset. 756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 7 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 4 In the Type Selector. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.

under Elevations. click Modify. Divide the halves into quarters. Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. double-click East.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 16 On the Design Bar. you change some panels in the system. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. click Curtain Grid. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. and then sixteenths. Next. Next. you place grids on the system. eighths. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. 14 In the Project Browser.

18 In the Type Selector. click Lines. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. 3 In the Project Browser. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. to filter out all other 19 Save the file. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . double-click Exterior. select the bottom layer of panels. click Training Files.Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. 6 On the Options Bar.rft.300mm. under Elevations. enter 100. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. click . Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. and on the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . for Depth. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system.

and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. and return to the project file. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. . for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. and click . 19 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Panel . right-click.Pattern.rfa. click Model Lines. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 . and click OK. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid.Pattern. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Finish Sketch. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 14 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. select Glass. under Floor Plans. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. All fourth floor panels are selected. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. clear Chain. 18 Load the Curtain Panel .8 On the Design Bar.rfa family.Pattern.

23 Right-click. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 26 In the Project Browser. and then click (Dynamically Modify View). 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. The finished arc wall should look like the following image.22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. All the panels change to the solid panel. 27 Highlight a panel in the arc. right-click. 29 Save the file. and click Flip Orientation. select System Panel . under Floor Plans. 24 On the View toolbar. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 28 In the Type Selector. All fifth floor panels are selected. 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .Solid. click (Default 3D View).

rft. enter 8. Select Radius. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. click ■ ■ For Sides. For vertical mullions. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. . Click again to specify the ending point. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. double-click East. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. click Mullion. and enter 50 mm for the radius. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). and select it. under Elevations. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . and click OK. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. for Profile Usage. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. select Mullion. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog.

26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 17 On the Design Bar.rfa. 20 Select the detail component.rfa. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. and click OK. and return to the project file. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Circular Mullion for Family. double-click Southeast Isometric. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. it can be added as a mullion type. clear Fine. 30 Click . The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. and click Visibility. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. click Visibility.detail. click Modify. 12 Select the lines in the octagon.rfa family. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. click Training Files. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 28 Click . 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Detail Component. clear Coarse and Medium. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. After the new profile is loaded. 19 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. under 3D Views. click Mullion. 27 In the Project Browser. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . click Duplicate. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 43 Save the file. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. and then apply those custom elements to the system. for Profile. under Floor Plans. This completes the exercise for adding mullions.32 Click Edit/New. so you remove the unwanted ones. click Modify. You have placed more mullions than you want. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. and click OK. In this lesson. 37 On the Options Bar. make custom curtain panels and mullions. you learned to create a curved curtain system. 35 Under Construction. 36 Click OK twice. select All Empty Segments. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 39 On the Design Bar. right-click. 42 Press DELETE.

Click OK. a storefront system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. click Finish Roof. enter 600. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. All the inside faces highlight. 4 On the Design Bar. TIP To chain select all the walls. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. select Defines slope. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. under Floor Plans. and you can click to select them all. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and press TAB. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. 5 On the Options Bar. and a ruled curtain system. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. click Roof Properties.Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 1 In the Project Browser.

select Entire Grid Line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 11 On the View Control Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR.10 In the Project Browser. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. Storefront System | 765 . This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. under 3D Views. click Mullion. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Modify. Storefront System In this exercise. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 18 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

select Unconnected for Height. 4 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. and enter 2400. click Wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 5 On the Options Bar. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. 8 Click the temporary dimension. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. To see how the grid layout is defined. 12 Select the storefront wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. under 3D Views. and press ENTER. Storefront System | 767 . you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. click Edit/New.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. even if the wall height changes. and click . 10 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar. This specifies an exact length for the wall. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. click Modify. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. which is specified in the type. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. For this wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. enter 10200 mm.

This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. and Offset. you find Number. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. In this exercise. select All Empty Segments. or end. enter 15. 19 Select a curtain grid. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. 16 Click OK. Justification.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. Angle. center. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. double-click Southeast Isometric. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. click Mullion. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . see the Revit Architecture help. under 3D Views. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 18 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 20 Save the file. By setting the Angle value. Under Vertical Grid Pattern.

7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. and highlight the model line. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. Curtain System by Lines | 769 . 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight.3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Click the highlighted line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.

A panel between the 2 lines is created. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. click Curtain Grid. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 11 Click OK. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. 10 Select the panel. Next. and click . but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. quarters. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 9 On the Design Bar. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. and then eighths.8 Select the highlighted line. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. click Modify.

This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. quarters. and then eighths. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. Finally. and define a ruled curtain system. 16 In the Type Selector. 18 Save the file. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. select System Panel : Solid. right-click. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. Curtain System by Lines | 771 .

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

gutters. and soffits to the roofs that you create. 773 .Roofs 19 In this tutorial. In addition. you learn how to add fascia. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008.

and open Metric\m_Roofs. select Name. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. you learn to create several different types of roofs. expand Views (all). a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. verify that Section: Section1 is selected.rvt. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 4 Click OK. 5 In the Go To View dialog. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. You do not need to create the work plane. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and mansard roofs. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. including hip. expand Floor Plans. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. In this lesson. gable. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog.Creating Roofs In this lesson. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. shed. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. verify Level 3 is selected for Level.

you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click the blue square on the witness line. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. centerline. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 . click Ref Plane.The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. and so on). 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof.

click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile. Next. select Chain. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. click Lines. 13 On the Options Bar.

click . The roof should resemble the following illustration. click to display the model. click . Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 17 On the Tools toolbar. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . 16 On the View toolbar. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Next.The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. press TAB. 18 Select the edge of the roof. and then select the exterior face of the wall. 19 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall.

21 In the Project Browser. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. and double-click Section 1. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 26 On the View toolbar. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. and select the second wall. 24 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. press CTRL. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. expand Sections (Type 1).

and enter 600 for Overhang. m_Roofs. 2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. Next. click . 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. clear Defines slope. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. select both slope definition lines. 3 On the Options Bar. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 6 On the Options Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 9 Press CTRL. 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. click Pick Walls. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. verify that Defines slope is selected. By default. click Modify.rvt. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. and on the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 .

3 On the Options Bar. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 11 On the Design Bar. When you complete the roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 13 On the View toolbar. and double-click Level 3. under Dimensions.10 In the Element Properties dialog. and enter 600 for Overhang. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. expand Views (all). After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. clear Defines slope. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. click Finish Roof. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 12 When you see the informational dialog. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.rvt. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. and click OK. click Pick Walls. m_Roofs.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. click Lines. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. Next. press TAB. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 . Next. sketch the chimney opening. click Modify. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 13 On the Options Bar. click . 8 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click to select all the walls. 9 Using automatic snaps. add new slope lines to the roof. 10 On the View menu.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 19 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pick Walls. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs .rvt. 18 On the View toolbar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. and double-click Level 2. click Finish Roof. close the roof sketch.15 On the Options bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. select Defines slope. m_Roofs. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 1 In the Project Browser. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines Slope. Next. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click to view the new roof in the model. 3 On the Options Bar.

16 On the View toolbar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 7 On the Options Bar. click Lines. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model. Next. select the left vertical slope definition line. 11 To trim the first line segment. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 9 On the Tools toolbar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and click . click . click Roof Properties. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 . Next. 14 Under Constraints. and click OK. clear Defines Slope. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. using the following illustration for guidance. click Finish Roof. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 10 On the Options Bar.

Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 784 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click . and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. 23 On the Tools toolbar. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. click Modify. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house.17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 18 On the Design Bar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. Next. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. join the two remaining walls to the roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously.

you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 6 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 2. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785. and enter 300 for Overhang.The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. m_Roofs. 4 On the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. clear Defines Slope. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.rvt. press TAB. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. enter 0 for Overhang. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. 16 Under Constraints. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs .7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. click Roof Properties. 13 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 10 To trim the first line segment. and press ENTER. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you add a slope-defining line. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines slope. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 9 On the Options Bar. Next. click Modify. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. select the left vertical roof line. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. and click OK. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click . Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 2. click . Next. To help locate the position of each split. 7 On the Options Bar. verify is selected. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. m_Roofs. 4 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. clear Defines Slope. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . click Slope Arrow. expand Views (all).21 Proceed to the next exercise. Next. and enter 600 for Offset. expand 3D Views. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Modify.rvt. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. you need to add two reference planes. click Ref Plane. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. expand Views (all). 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. add two new slope arrows. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. expand Floor Plans. 12 On the Options Bar. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. click Split Walls and Lines. 14 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools menu. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. Before you can add slope arrows.

3 On the Options Bar. select both slope arrows. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. click Edit. m_Roofs. click Modify. 18 Press CTRL. 20 Under Dimensions.rvt. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 5 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 500 for Rise/1000. the adjacent eave heights must align. 23 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. select Slope for Specify. and double-click Garage Roof. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. When you sketch a hip roof. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. expand Views (all). When eave heights differ. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . Begin the tail at the right reference plane. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. select Defines Slope. and move the cursor to place the arrow. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. . and click 19 Under Constraints.15 to add the second slope arrow. expand Floor Plans. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 12 On the Design Bar. click Align Eaves. Next. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 14 If you want to save your changes. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. “Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. on the Options Bar. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. click Finish Roof. The eave lines display with a dimension. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click to display the model. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 13 On the View toolbar. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. When aligning eaves. on the File menu.6 With the two gable end lines selected. click Save As. select a method to align the eaves. click . you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Dimensions.

click Training Files. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the roof and. under Constraints. 6 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click to display the model. expand Views (all). you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.rvt. on the Options Bar. and double-click North.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click . expand Elevations. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

and soffits. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. 17 On the View toolbar. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. and select the remaining three lines. gutters. 18 If you want to save your changes. click Finish Roof. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. on the File menu. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Modify. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and Soffits In this lesson. press TAB. under Dimensions. Gutters. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. and Soffits | 791 .Next. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. Creating Fascia. gutters. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Lines. and then select Defines slope. Gutters. and double-click Level 3. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click . expand Floor Plans. you can easily create its fascia. After you create a roof. click . click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating Fascia. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Save As.

and click OK twice. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. click Duplicate.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Training Files. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and click OK. click Training Files. and click Open.rvt.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. 3 Press CTRL. click . enter Built-up Fascia. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 8 In the Name dialog.rfa. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. under Construction. and open Common\c_Condominium. 5 On the Options Bar.

click . c_Condominium. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof.13 On the Design Bar. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model.rvt. under Construction. 3 In the Properties dialog. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 Click to place the gutter. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. click Edit/New. click in the Value field for Material. click Modify to exit the Fascia command. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. Creating Gutters In this exercise. Creating Gutters | 793 . 2 On the Options Bar. . 14 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. and click OK three times. and click OK. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Pick Roofs. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. expand Views. Creating Soffits In this exercise.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 4 Select the roof. c_Condominium. and double-click Roof. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. you learn how to place a roof soffit.

6 In the Project Browser. 9 If you want to save your changes.5 On the Design Bar. and then select the soffit to join them. on the File menu. click Save As. click Finish Sketch. Creating Soffits | 795 . 7 On the Tools menu. 8 Select the roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). and double-click 3D. click Join Geometry.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. 797 . Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Finally.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.

2 In the Project Units dialog. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Length. Click OK. If you are using metric units. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. expand Views (all). You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. For Rounding. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 Under Area. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . select m2 Click OK. These schemes define spatial relationships. expand Floor Plans. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. select Millimeters. click Project Units.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. and click Room and Area. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog.rvt. click Settings. and open Common\c_Area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. click the Area Schemes tab. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. In the final exercise. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. select mm. click Training Files. For Unit Suffix. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. 4 In the Project Units dialog. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click OK. select 2 decimal places. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. select Square meters. your values will be different. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. For Unit Suffix.

8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. the system-computed height defaults to the level. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 12 When the informational dialog displays. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. When you select Yes in this dialog. you must manually add these boundary lines. 13 In the Project Browser. or 0. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). forming a closed loop. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Click OK. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. If you select No. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. it is not necessary in this exercise. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. 9 Click Cancel. click Area Plan. click the Room Calculations tab. under Views (all). ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically.

An area is represented by two crossed reference lines.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. rather than the area tag. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. To modify the area. common areas. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. click Area Plan. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. click Area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Click OK. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. Next. you must select one of the reference lines. you create a new area plan for rentable space. and store area. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas.

When you add area boundary lines. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Expand Area Plans (Rentable). you can either draw them or pick them. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. When you pick the walls. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. click Area. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 23 On the Design Bar.Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. If you do not select this option. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 . click Area Boundary.

30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the area. Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 29 On the Design Bar.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. click Modify. 27 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click Area. 31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar. click . click . and click to select the area. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name.33 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. In the Element Properties dialog. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. Click OK. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. enter Core for Name. 35 Add an area to the building model core. Select Office area for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall.

37 On the File menu. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. name the project Area-in progress. click Save. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.Notice that within the two store areas. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. click Color Scheme Legend. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. and click Save. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . In the next exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. and click to place the legend. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.

8 Add the fields Area and Name. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. and click OK. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 . under Category. 9 Click OK. click Schedule/Quantities. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. select Areas (Rentable). The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 7 Under Available fields. select Area Type and click Add.3 When the dialog displays. click the Fields tab. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the New Schedule dialog.

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. or both. At any time. In this tutorial. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. and roofs. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you then need to update the building face.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. After you make building elements. 807 . floors. building elements. If you modify a massing face. curtain systems. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you can specify the view to display massing elements.

The Design Bar title changes to Mass. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Views (all). click Create Mass.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. and cutting geometry. double-click Level 1. sweeps. roofs. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. click Training Files. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and click Massing. floor. and floors. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. under Floor Plans. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. You assign the default wall.

9 In the Element Properties dialog. and click 17 On the Options Bar.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . click . and click OK. double-click Level 1. click Finish Sketch. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. and then click . click Lines. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click the Value for Material. 10 In the Materials dialog. 15 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. under Constraints. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. under Views (all). Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Lines. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. click Extrusion Properties. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. 13 On the View toolbar.

29 In the drawing area. under Views (all). 23 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click {3D} to see the results. 20 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. highlight the larger form. and click OK. select Pick a plane. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. click Extrusion Properties. 28 In the Work Plane dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 30 Click to select the face. press TAB to highlight the entire face. 25 In the Project Browser. double-click West. TIP If necessary. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 21 In the Element Properties dialog.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. under Constraints. 22 In the Materials dialog. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click OK. The second form is on top of the first form. and then click . click the Value for Material. and click OK. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. under Views (all). 810 | Chapter 21 Massing .

33 On the Options Bar. click . you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. TIP If you do not see this option. click . and click on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 . and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. Next. 36 On the Options Bar. click the arrow next to the drawing options. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click Lines. and click to select the line start point. 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown.31 On the Sketch Design Bar. 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line.

47 On the Options Bar. click Edit Top. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. . double-click East. click 48 Create an arc as shown. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing . . on the Options Bar. click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 44 In the Project Browser. 45 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). click . 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 40 On the Edit toolbar. click Lines and. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Modify. and delete the vertical construction line.38 On the Design Bar. 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.

Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. click Blend Properties. 53 Proceed to the next exercise.49 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . 52 On the View toolbar. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. and click OK. click . you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. In the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. In this exercise. 51 On the Design Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch.

2 In the drawing area. 14 Click OK. click Ref Plane. 7 Using the same technique. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. When sketching each extrusion. on the View Control Bar. click and select Chain. double-click Level 1. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane.rvt. and 0 for Extrusion Start. as shown. click Lines and.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and then click Hidden Line. 1 In the Project Browser. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 12 On the Design Bar. snap the corners to the intersections. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 814 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Floor Plans. click and enter 15000 for Offset. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. under Views (all). you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 15 On the Design Bar. click Extrusion Properties. 4 On the Options bar. click Finish Sketch. on the Options Bar. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. select the mass. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. m_Massing_Start. 13 Under Constraints.

4 In the Family Types dialog. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete.16 On the View toolbar. under Other. 18 On the File menu. you create new family types from a mass family file. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. click Finish Mass. click Family Types. click Training Files.rvt. click Save As. 12000 mm for Height. click . You then load that mass family file and others into a project. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Apply. In this exercise. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 2 In the Family Types dialog. enter 15000 mm for Width. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. Finally. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. and click OK. and 18000 mm for Depth. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box.rfa. 17 On the Mass Design Bar. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. click New. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . 3 In the Name dialog.

Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. and 9000 mm for Depth. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 10 On the File menu. 1 If not already selected. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. 18000 mm for Height. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. 11000 mm for Height. click Training Files. click Save As. You also load other existing mass families and place them. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. and click Apply. and 6000 mm for Depth. and click Apply. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width.rfa. In this exercise. and click OK. 9 Click OK.

21 On the Options Bar. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. 11 Select the box.rfa. 3 On the View Control Bar. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . select the triangle. 23 On the Options Bar. and click . click Training Files.rfa family files.rfa. Semi Barrel Vault. and click OK twice. and Triangle. 8 In the Type Selector. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 17 Press CTRL. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 25 In the drawing area. 20 In the Type Selector. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 24 On the Design Bar. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. and click to place the mass. and click . 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. click Place Mass. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement.rfa. 14 In the Type Selector. 6 Open the Box-Training. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. enter 90 for Angle. and click OK twice. under Views (all). select the 3 boxes.2 In the Project Browser. click Place Mass. 10 On the Design Bar. 4 On the File menu. click Modify. click Modify. Arc Dome.

You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click OK twice. In this exercise. 29 In the Type Selector. 34 On the View menu. 33 On the View toolbar. 31 Select the box and click . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. you join these mass elements. In the next exercise. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click .26 Select the triangle. 30 Place the box mass family as shown. and click OK twice. click Orient ➤ Northeast. click . click Place Mass.

Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.rvt file. click . you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. .Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 819 . 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. 4 Select the triangle. NOTE When you join geometry. and then press ESC to see the result. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.

click for Axis. under Floor Plans. on the Edit toolbar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. under Views (all). TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. double-click Site. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. click 8 On the Options Bar. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing . and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. enter SM.

you joined mass elements together. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click . Joining Mass Elements | 821 . The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. and then select the triangle. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 17 Press ESC to see the result. .12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. In this exercise.

7 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. double-click Site. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click Place Mass. click Modify. select Sloped (primary). and select the triangle mass element. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. (If Design Options is already selected. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. 5 In the Project Browser. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. enter 90 degrees for Angle. click . 1 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. do not clear the check mark. under Views (all). 2 On the Window menu.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. and then click OK. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. under Floor Plans. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass.rvt.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. clear Curved.

and click . under Elevations. 13 On the Design Bar. and click . under Views (all). select the three arc domes. and click Wireframe.12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. 21 In the drawing area. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. and click OK twice. 20 On the Design Bar. 14 In the drawing area. 23 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Type Selector. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. and click OK twice. double-click North. click . select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. click Modify. 16 On the View Control Bar. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. click Modify. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 .

click Visibility/Graphics. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. and click OK. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. select Curved. click . under 3D Views. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. and click Wireframe. select Curved from the Design Option menu. and click OK. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. TIP To find the correct shapes. click the Design Options tab. and watch the status bar.24 On the View Control Bar. double-click {3D}. 29 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. 32 Click the value for Design Option. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. click . under Views (all). clear Sloped. While pressing CTRL. 30 On the View menu. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.

you pick massing faces to create walls. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. 36 On the File menu. 34 In the Design Options dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Option. select Curved and.rvt. you can make it the primary option. In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 .rvt. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. click . Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. 35 Close the warning that displays. click Training Files. you placed mass elements into Design Options. and click Close. click Make Primary.

9 On the Design Bar.Brick on CMU. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. click Wall by Face. 3 On the View menu. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. under Floor Plans. click to show the massing model. 5 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Orient ➤ Southeast. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 6 On the Options Bar. click . 2 On the View toolbar. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Views (all). TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. 826 | Chapter 21 Massing .1 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. double-click Level 3.

alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Floor Plans. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 14 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Wall by Face. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 18 Select all the faces shown in red. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . 16 In the Type Selector. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 5. under Floor Plans.NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). under Views (all). 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 12 On the Design Bar.

You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. 20 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 9. 828 | Chapter 21 Massing . 21 On the Design Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. and click Wireframe. 19 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Wall by Face.You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create floors. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. If desired. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. click . Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise.

6 On the Options Bar. and Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 . 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. under Views (all).Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select all levels. click Floor Area Faces. clear Curtain Panels. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Curtain Systems. 4 Click OK. double-click {3D}.

and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. click Floor Area Faces. 10 Press CTRL. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Orient ➤ Northeast.8 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Levels 1-4. 9 On the View menu. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing .

15 Press CTRL. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create Floors. click Floor Area Faces. and click OK. clear Exclude Options. 14 On the Options Bar. 23 On the View toolbar. 20 On the Options Bar. click . and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. click Modify. under Floor Plans.13 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. 16 On the Options Bar. click Floor by Face. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. select Level 1. under Views (all). verify that Select Multiple is selected. 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. 18 In the Project Browser. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 .

In this exercise.24 In the Project Browser. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. you pick massing faces to create roofs. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Schedules/Quantities. double-click Mass Schedule. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass.

6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.400mm. select Basic Roof : Generic . 4 In the Type Selector. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). double-click {3D}. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown.rvt. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 1 In the Project Browser. click Create Roof. click Create Roof. click Roof by Face. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.

12 Click the Model Categories tab. click Create Roof. and then click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Panels. In this exercise. and Walls.Your model should now look as shown. Curtain Systems. click Visibility/Graphics. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 834 | Chapter 21 Massing . select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. 11 On the View menu. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected.

and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 5 Press CTRL.rvt. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 . 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. click Curtain System by Face. 1 In the Project Browser. click Create System. under Views (all).Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

836 | Chapter 21 Massing . 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass.7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes.

click Create System. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 .9 On the Options Bar. In this exercise.

Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 30000 for Width.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . click OK. Floors. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. under Floor Plans. and Walls. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Site. and then click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . 6 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK.rvt. clear Curtain Panels. 3 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. under Views (all). click Edit/New. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. Next. Curtain Systems. 2 On the View menu. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.

14 Open the 3D view to see the result. click Modify. clear Exclude Options.10 On the Design Bar. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 11 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 .

Also. click OK. TIP To select the curtain wall. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. click . under Views (all). 19 On the View toolbar. In the next steps. click Remake. 17 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. you want to select the smaller one. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. double-click Level 1. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . 15 In the Project Browser. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown.

click Remake.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. 21 On the Options Bar. you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 . 20 Select the roof as shown.

In this exercise.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click Remake. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 Open the 3D view. you changed the size of an existing mass family.

6 On the Model Categories tab. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. click All to select all categories. right-click on the 3D view. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. and click OK. 4 Rename the view 3D . 3 In the Project Browser. 8 Click None to clear the selection. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. click Visibility/Graphics. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 . 9 Select Mass. 5 On the View menu.Massing only.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. 7 Clear one of the check boxes.

This concludes the massing tutorial. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof. to the building shell. You might create the model shown. If desired.In this exercise. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. 844 | Chapter 21 Massing .

This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. You can also nest groups within other groups. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. all instances in the building model are updated. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. 845 . you also simplify the modification process. For example.Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. In this tutorial. place. and modify repetitive units. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. By grouping objects. you not only simplify their placement. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. or with those working on a different project. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group.

you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. In another exercise.rvt. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click First Floor. In this exercise. hotel rooms. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. Modifying. expand Views (all). The new group is considered nested within the host group. click Training Files. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position.Creating. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. the host group is also updated automatically. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. and typical office layouts. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. When you make changes to a nested group. you add the new model group to a previously created group. expand Floor Plans. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. After you create a model group. You mirror one instance of the group.

3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. and click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar. enter Typical Kitchen.2 Enter ZR. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. click (Group). Creating and Placing a Group | 847 .

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Zoom To Fit. 848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Zoom flyout. click Modify. 8 On the View toolbar. Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area.

expand Model. under Groups. click Modify.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click Create Instance. 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. 12 On the Design Bar. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 . right-click Typical Kitchen.

850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 15 On the Options Bar.13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. clear Copy. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. click (Mirror). 14 On the Edit toolbar.

click (Rotate). and on the toolbar.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell. Creating and Placing a Group | 851 . 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.

20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Zoom flyout.19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping .

click Save As. one mirrored.rvt. Modifying a Group | 853 . Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. and one rotated. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt. Modifying a Group In this exercise. When you finish editing. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you make changes to an instance of a group. and click Save. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. as shown. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation.

This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. press TAB. (Include group member). and click to select it. 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 3 Click (Exclude group member). press TAB to highlight the wall. select the element. and click to select the wall. press TAB. 5 Click (Exclude group member). NOTE To display an excluded element.2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click 4 Move the cursor over the door. and click to select the door. 7 Click (Exclude group member).

select Basic Wall : Generic . click Modify. Modifying a Group | 855 . 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.8 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. 10 In the Type Selector. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 15 On the Options Bar.127mm. click Modify. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Wall. move the cursor to the left. click Door. clear Tag on Placement.

Zoom flyout. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 23 In the drawing area. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. In edit group mode.17 On the Design Bar. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. 18 On the View toolbar. click Zoom To Fit. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Edit Group. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. click Modify. 21 On the Options Bar. All other elements in the model are grayed out. move the cursor up. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group.

which acts as the host. click Modify. under Constraints. for Unconnected Height.rvt. 29 In the group editor toolbar. click Properties. in the Project Browser. and click OK. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Finish. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. Nesting Groups | 857 . Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. enter 2134.25 On the Design Bar. double-click First Floor. Nesting Groups In this exercise. 26 Select the opening. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. and on the Options Bar. created in an earlier lesson. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. enter 1000. under Floor Plans. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. you add the Typical Kitchen group. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. 28 For Base Offset. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save.

2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 In the group editor toolbar. 858 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click (Add to Group). click Edit Group. 5 In the drawing area. select the Typical Kitchen group.

Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. select the wall between the folding doors. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. click Finish. 7 In the group editor toolbar. such as door and window tags.6 Press TAB. and each of the bifold doors. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. under Floor Plans. 8 In the Project Browser. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . double-click Second Floor. and filled regions. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. you add door tags to a group. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. In the next exercise. such as text. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model.

under Floor Plans. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. click Filled Region. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. click to draw a rectangular region.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click First Floor. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress.rvt. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.

7 On the Design Bar. click to add an arc leader. click Modify.6 Move the cursor down and to the left. 9 On the Options Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. and on the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 861 . 12 Enter Tile. Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click Finish Sketch. and select a point below the left elevator. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.

right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. click Modify. double-click Second Floor. 14 On the Edit toolbar. 16 In the drawing area. and click OK. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click (Group). Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click Create Instance. under Floor Plans. expand Detail. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 In the Project Browser. and select the note and the filled region. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. under Groups. as shown.

21 In the drawing area. click Tag ➤ By Category. Because the detail group contains variables. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 On the Options Bar. click to place the detail group. double-click First Floor. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. clear Leader. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 22 On the Design Bar. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. under Floor Plans. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Zoom To Fit. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt.

8 In the Filter dialog. click (Group). and click OK. as shown: 5 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Edit toolbar. draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 7 On the Options Bar. select Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). click Check None. click Modify. 864 | Chapter 22 Grouping .

and click OK. double-click Second Floor.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. 14 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. therefore. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. for Attached Detail Group Name. 11 In the Project Browser. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click Place Detail. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group.

the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). and click Save Group. and click Save.rvt. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. for Create new. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. browse to the Desktop. accept the default template file. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. In this case. click Modify. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. 3 For File name. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click OK. select 2 Bedroom Unit. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. verify that Same as group name is selected. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. When you load the group from the library into a new project.16 On the Design Bar. verify that Project is selected. and click Open. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. under Groups\Model. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. click Desktop. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. click New ➤ Project.rvt. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units.

expand Groups. click Training Files. and on the Options Bar.A warning dialog is displayed. click Use Existing. and click Create Instance. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. click Modify. and expand Model. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. click Link. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file.rvt. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. When a group is converted to a link. 12 On the Design Bar. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group.

click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Remove Link. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 24 In the message dialog. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click OK. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . click Bind. expand Revit Links.rvt file is added as a link to the project. 20 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. and click OK. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify. and the link is removed.17 On the Design Bar. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 18 In the Project Browser. verify that Attached Details is selected only. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. select the linked Revit model. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog.

you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project. 869 .Site 23 In this tutorial.

convert the data to a table. This project file was created using the default metric template. and click Site. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. You add property lines manually. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . 4 On the Options Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. In the second part of this exercise. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. you create a toposurface using two different methods. expand Floor Plans. In the final exercises. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. and walkways. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. click Point. click Training Files. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.rvt. right-click in the Design Bar. Using the first method. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.Using Site Tools In this lesson. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. and double-click Site. expand Views (all). you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. islands. and then modify the data. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you add a building pad to the site. and open Metric\m_First_Project.

enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Creating a Toposurface | 871 . The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Use the following illustration as a reference. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.

under Increment. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . and click OK. Use the following illustration as a reference. enter 1500 mm. under Additional Contours. click Finish Surface. 15000 mm. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 12000 mm. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 12 On the Settings menu. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. click Site Settings. 11 On the Design Bar.

15 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). 18 In the Project Browser. rename the level Base Site Elevation. 16 On the View toolbar. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . modify the level names and elevations.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. and press ENTER. click Model Graphics Style. and double-click South. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. rename the level Basement. click . click to delete it. Before importing the contour data. 23 Click the Level 1 text. enter 1000 mm. click Yes. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 21 Click the Level 2 text. and click Shading with Edges. click the elevation value. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 14 On the View toolbar. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. on the Standard toolbar.

29 Select the imported topography. 31 On the Design Bar. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. Until it is exploded.24 In the Project Browser. clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. it is considered an import symbol. click Modify. under Views (all). double-click Site. 30 On the Edit menu. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. and click OK. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar. select Preserve colors. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. Under Import or Link. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. click Training Files. click Pin Position. 25 On the File menu. Click Open. Under Layer/Level Colors.

clear Elevations. and then click OK. 32 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. clear C_INDX. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. and click OK. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. When you select the import symbol. 34 Under Visibility. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . when the edges highlight. click the Annotation Categories tab. select it. click Toposurface.

click . 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 40 On the View toolbar.rvt. and click Save. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 42 On the View toolbar. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . this project file is required in its current state. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876. 39 On the Design Bar. you add property lines using two methods. click Save As. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Using the second method. 43 On the File menu. click Finish Surface. Using the first method. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. name the project Site-in progress. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.

add an arc line on the right.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. click Lines. do so before continuing. click Property Line. Using the 3-point Arc tool. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. Select and delete the right vertical line. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Adding Property Lines | 877 . Site-in progress. select Create property lines by sketching. If you have not completed the previous exercise. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click OK. double-click Site.rvt. Click Modify.

click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. A warning dialog is displayed. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . 8 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. click 12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. click Property Line. 10 In the Property Lines dialog.6 On the Design Bar. select the lines. and click OK. on the Standard toolbar. 15 Starting in Row #1. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. click OK. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. select Edit Table. when they highlight. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. click Finish Sketch. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click OK. 9 In the warning dialog.

25 Under Visibility. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed.Notice that after you complete the last line. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. 22 In the Tags dialog. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Before adding property line segment tags. click Training Files. 16 Click OK.rfa. and click OK. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click to place the property lines. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. click the Imported Categories tab. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. This means there is no gap in the property lines. click Visibility/Graphics. 23 On the View menu. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 20 Click Load. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. 19 In the Tags dialog.dwg and click OK. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Adding Property Lines | 879 . Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. If the gap is not closed. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off.

30 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. In the next exercise. and click Shading with Edges. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 31 On the File menu. The tags display more prominently in this view. clear Leader. click to place it. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. this project file is required in its current state. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines. click Model Graphics Style. click Save. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. and click Drafting. 27 On the Options Bar. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. In this exercise.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. In the final step. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . right-click in the Design Bar. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. you created two sets of property lines.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. under Contour Line Display. and click Wireframe. In the Object Styles dialog. select Dash dot. click Model Graphics Style. enter 1000. select Single Value. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 . scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. 2 On the Settings menu. enter the name Working Contour. select Working Contour. Under Range Type. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. click New. click Site Settings. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 10 Under Additional Contours. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0.0 mm. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Under Subcategory. Under Line Color. 7 Click OK. select Topography. click Object Styles. and click OK. select a shade of Brown. Site-in progress.rvt. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. for Subcategory. Under Line Pattern.

12 On the File menu.11 Click OK. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. In the next exercise. parking areas. In this exercise. such as material. and islands. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. Working Contour. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. parking areas. you create topographic subregions to define roads. and islands. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. you create subregions in order to define roads. click Close. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. The next exercise requires a new dataset. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . The object style subcategory.

click Subregion. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. click Lines. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. try to replicate the location and proportion. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. click Training Files. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. and open Metric\m_Site. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 .Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Although the exact dimensions are not important.rvt. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. 2 On the Design Bar.

you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. 884 | Chapter 23 Site . click Shading with Edges. 9 On the View menu. click the Value for Material. click Properties. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 6 In the Materials dialog.NOTE In the Metric dataset. under Identity Data. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. click Finish Sketch.Tarmacadam for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. When you finish the sketch in a later step. 8 On the Design Bar. enter Parking for Name. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. and click OK. select Site . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. under Materials and Finishes. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog.

double-click Topography Schedule. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. expand Schedules/Quantities. 12 On the View Control Bar. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. As you create new subregions. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. click Edit Boundary. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. 17 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. and double-click Topography Schedule. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 .Tarmacadam. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. and click Shading with Edges. 18 In the Project Browser. Delete overlapping lines. they display within this schedule. 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Notice that the project area has increased. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser.

click Finish Sketch. and click Hidden Line. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. enter Island . click Model Graphics Style. Within each subregion. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . 26 In the Materials dialog. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Properties. 20 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.Grass for Name. and click Shading with Edges. under Floor Plans. click the Value for Material. under Identity Data. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. click Lines. double-click Topography Schedule. 23 In the upper-right parking area.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. under Schedules/Quantities. 28 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 29 On the View Control Bar. select Site . click Model Graphics Style. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area.Grass for Name. In this training project. 22 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Subregion.

Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.Grass. 35 On the Design Bar. You must sketch each region separately. double-click Site. 34 On the Design Bar. Notice that the schedule has been updated.Grass. Name each region Island . under Schedules/Quantities.walkway. Name the subregion Walkway. 32 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. and apply the material Concrete . Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 . Using the techniques learned in previous steps. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. double-click Topography Schedule. click Subregion. click Lines. under Floor Plans. and apply the material Site .Cast-in-Situ Concrete .31 In the Project Browser. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.

click Save As. 888 | Chapter 23 Site . Notice that the schedule has been updated. there is still only one toposurface. 37 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. double-click Topography Schedule. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. 38 In the Project Browser.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. 39 On the File menu. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. under Schedules/Quantities.

A warning dialog is displayed. double-click Site. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. see the tutorial. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. under Phasing. When you use the grading tool. 2 Select the toposurface.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. click Modify. Grading the Toposurface | 889 . Notice that the toposurface displays differently. and click Save. click . you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. “Using Phasing” on page 992. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. this project file is required in its current state. and click OK.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. Site tutorial-in progress. under Floor Plans. select Existing for Phase Created. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

6 On the Design Bar. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 8 Select the topographic surface. select Copy Internal Points. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 890 | Chapter 23 Site . click Graded Region. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. and click Select and Edit.

Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . 11 On the View Control Bar.10 Press DELETE. demolished. and click Hidden Line. and new. click Model Graphics Style. 13 Press DELETE. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

click . click Finish Surface. 15 On the Options Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style. 892 | Chapter 23 Site . 20 On the View toolbar. 19 On the View Control Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click . and click Shading with Edges. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration.Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. click Point.

A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. When you add a building pad. you can delete it. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Therefore. under Phasing. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the File menu. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. only the original toposurface displays. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. click View Properties. Site tutorial-in progress. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. this project file is required in its current state. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. 23 Select the toposurface. under Phasing. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . and click OK. you create a building pad. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. specify Existing for Phase. click Save. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. 24 On the View menu.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click View Properties.rvt. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. specify New Construction for Phase. Only the graded topography displays. and delete it.

NOTE By default. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. If you have an existing building model. 2 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. 4 On the Design Bar. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . click Pad. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. click Lines. the Pick Walls command is active. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. under Floor Plans.Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser.

Adding Site Components In this exercise. “Adding Site Components” on page 895. click building pad. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style.6 On the Design Bar. click Save. Adding Site Components | 895 . . . click Finish Sketch. click 9 On the View toolbar. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 8 On the View toolbar. and click Shading with Edges. 7 On the View Control Bar. this project file is required in its current state. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Notice the new 10 On the File menu.

click Parking Component.90 deg. 896 | Chapter 23 Site . 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and select the parking space. double-click Site. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. 3 In the Type Selector. Site tutorial-in progress. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

. click 9 On the View toolbar.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. double-click Site. click Site Component. Adding Site Components | 897 . click parking spaces. 8 On the View toolbar. . Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. under Floor Plans.

14 On the View toolbar. 13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . click .12 In the Type Selector. choose any tree type.

15 On the View toolbar. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 . In the following illustration.rvt. click Tag All Not Tagged. click . 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. under Floor Plans. Site tutorial-in progress. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Save. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. this project file is required in its current state. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 16 On the File menu.

this project file is required in its current state. click the Fields tab. 5 On the View menu. 7 On the File menu. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. click Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. click Schedule/Quantities. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click Apply. click Hidden Line. select Mark. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. and click OK. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees.rvt. you create a parking schedule. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. In the following exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. and click Add. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. click Apply. and click OK. select Parking for Category. 4 Under Available fields. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value.

under Views (all). select Type. The parking schedule is displayed. select Type. and under Heading. number the first three spaces consecutively. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. click Save. 10 In the Project Browser. 6 Click the Formatting tab. select Mark. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . double-click Site. 12 In the Site plan. and click OK. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. under Space. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. click Close Hidden Windows. 9 On the Window menu. enter Size. 7 Under Fields. 11 On the Window menu.5 Under Available fields. click Tile. finish numbering the remaining spaces. under Space. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. and click Add. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. 8 Under Fields. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 13 In the Parking Schedule. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 14 In the Parking Schedule. and under Heading. enter Space. 15 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. If necessary.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it.Structural 24 In this tutorial. 903 . In the final lesson. columns. and beams to Level 1. You begin by adding the structural walls. After completing level 1. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton.

you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. If necessary. and double-click Level 2. Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. under Import or Link.dwg. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. under Floor Plans. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 4 In the Import/Link dialog. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open.rvt. and open Metric\m_Structural. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. under Views (all). you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. click Training Files. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Training Files. specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import). and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog. 2 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog. go to the Project Browser. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural .

right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. and select Origin to origin. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. 8 On the File menu. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. In this exercise. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. to trace the initial set of structural walls. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. After you trace the walls. you imported a DWG file. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Structural_tutorial. select Automatically place.rvt. Select All for Layers. click Save As. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . 6 Under Positioning. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. select Invert colors. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. This file is used in the next exercise.■ ■ Select Current view only. 7 Click Open. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan.

8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line.200mm. click Structural Wall. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. First. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. In addition.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. In the steps that follow. rather than the height. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. specify the following: ■ Select Depth. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. Click . and click to specify the wall endpoint. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.

12 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. and click the next line intersection. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 .9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. 13 On the View toolbar. and click to complete the chain of walls. 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. 10 Move the curser to the right. click . click Modify to finish the sketch.

zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. On the Options Bar. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. expand Floor Plans. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. expand Views (all). in the View toolbar. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view.TIP If necessary. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural . notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. click Structural Wall. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. and double-click Level 2. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines.

200mm. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. click . 26 On the Options Bar.dwg and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. click Structural Wall. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. clear m_Wall_Import. double-click Level 2. select Basic Wall: Generic . 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 23 Under Visibility.18 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. Click to create a three-point arc. 19 On the View toolbar. 25 In the Type Selector. click Modify to end the wall chain. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Imported Categories tab. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 . 21 On the View menu.

Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall.27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. This is the right extent of the arc. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. 28 On the Options Bar. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. This is the left extent of the arc. 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. click . 910 | Chapter 24 Structural . 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right.

and press Enter.32 On the Design Bar. click the value. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. If it is not. enter 1500. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . and press ENTER. 34 Select the horizontal wall. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. click Modify. enter 1500.

you create the final structural walls for the project. In the steps that follow.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. clear Chain. 38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. 36 On the Design Bar. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below. Both walls are 1200 mm long. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural .

2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. You then make minor modifications to their position. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. In the next exercise. 41 On the View toolbar. click . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 . Structural_tutorial. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. double-click Level 2. click Save.rvt. Floor Plans. click Modify. 42 On the File menu. “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. This project file is required. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. 40 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser. in its current state. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. In this exercise. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise.39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown.

After you select Entire Walls. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . Select Entire Walls for Pick. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. and click to place the dimension as shown. and when it highlights. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select .3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the Options button becomes available. click Modify. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Options to specify the wall pick options. select Intersecting Walls. 6 Move the cursor to the left. select it. and click OK. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall.

Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown. 9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal.8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 .

several different beam types. In the next lesson. joists. click Undo Edit Dimension Length. 13 On the File menu. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. you add structural columns. 12 On the Edit menu. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. in its current state. This project file is required. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. 916 | Chapter 24 Structural . to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. In this exercise. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced.11 Click the temporary dimension value. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. click Save. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model.

double-click Level 1. Adding Structural Columns | 917 . 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. click Structural Column. If necessary. TIP When adding the column. In addition. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. and you add a column outside the grids. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you use the grid intersection tool. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. 4 In the Type Selector. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. under Floor Plans. zoom in to place the column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. select Height and specify Level 2. 2 On the View menu.

918 | Chapter 24 Structural . and C5.7 Add similar columns to C2. C3. 9 Use a crossing selection. and select grids 1-5. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. click Grid Intersection. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. and A.

13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. Adding Structural Columns | 919 . Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR.TIP To create the crossing selection. Columns A3-5 are shown below. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5.

click Grid Intersection. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. click Modify. Columns B3-5 are shown below. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR.14 If necessary. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. zoom out until you can see all the grids. click Finish. click Structural Column. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . This completes this set of columns. click Finish. 21 Select column A5 and delete it.

in its current state. As you use the beam tool. This project file is required. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . you learn how to work with these varied conditions. you add beams manually. In this exercise. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. click Save. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. 26 On the File menu. you used various methods to add structural columns. 25 On the View toolbar. “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. In the next exercise.24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. click . and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. you add structural beams to the building model.

double-click Level 2. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 4 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Design Bar. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. Structural_tutorial. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. under Floor Plans. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . 2 On the View menu.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. click Beam. click Modify.

When you use the grid tool to place beams. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 . click Grid.7. and then move the cursor up to grid A. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder.9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Use the following table for other conditions. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. click Beam. 14 On the Options Bar. For example. 10 In the Type Selector. 11 On the Options Bar. select Girder for Usage. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. if a beam is joined column-to-column.

and press ENTER. 17 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. click the temporary dimension value. and select grid C. click Modify. click Grid. 23 On the Options Bar.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Beam. click Finish. enter 8200. 21 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL. 24 Select grid 3. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.

select Girder. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . select Chain. In addition.Notice beams are added between columns. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. Click column B5 to add the first beam. 25 On the Options Bar. and for Usage. click Finish. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. Press ESC to end the chain. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain.

and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. Press ESC to end the chain. 30 On the Options Bar. to snap only to intersections. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural . NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4.28 On the Options Bar. You can also use the shortcut key. select Girder for Usage. SI. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. connecting the column at B4. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. select Girder for Usage. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. Press ESC to end the chain. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4.

35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. 33 Select grid A. If the W310x32. click Finish. 36 On the Options Bar. The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32.Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. click Grid. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. click Grid.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. 34 On the Options Bar.7 beam had crossed grid A. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 . and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams.

43 In the Type Selector.37 Select grid B. 44 On the Options Bar. 38 On the Options Bar. click . click Beam. double-click Level 2. In the steps that follow. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. click Finish. Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. select Girder for Usage. under Floor Plans. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 39 On the View toolbar. 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below.

48 On the View toolbar. 47 On the Design Bar. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. click . Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints).46 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 . click Modify.

double-click Level 2. under Floor Plans. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. In the steps that follow.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser. and select Chain. click Beam. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . select Girder. 52 In the Type Selector. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. 53 On the Options Bar. and click when it intersects grid 2. for Usage.

56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. 57 On the View toolbar. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. click . Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 . and click when it intersects grid 1.

when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. double-click Level 2. for Usage. click Save. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. in its current state. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time.58 On the File menu. click Beam. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one.7. 5 On the Options Bar. In this exercise. For example. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. 4 In the Type Selector.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This project file is required. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. In the next exercise. You then create a joist array. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. Structural_tutorial. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural .B3 quadrants. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. you add joists and purlins to the building model. select Automatic. 2 Zoom around the A1 . you add joists and purlins to the building model.

click Modify. click Array. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. click on the Options Bar.7 On the Design Bar. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist. 11 Click OK. under Structural. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . on the Edit menu. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. 9 With the beam selected. you selected the Automatic option. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected.

enter 1250 and press ENTER. Enter 14 for Number. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Select 2nd for Move to.13 On the Options Bar. specify the following: Click . 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural . This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. Once the direction is set. Make sure the cursor is over grid A.

Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 . 17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. click Beam.

and color within the Object Styles dialog. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. 20 On the Edit menu. 21 On the Options Bar. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. and purlins. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. click Array.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. style. Enter 7 for Number. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value. joists. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. and click. specify the following: Click . Select 2nd for Move to.

Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. click .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. 27 On the Options Bar. under Other. click . Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 . 26 In the Filter dialog. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). 25 On the Options Bar. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. and click OK.

In the next lesson. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. 29 On the Design Bar. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. in its current state.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. Click OK. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . In this exercise. This project file is required. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. and notice the connection symbols display. click Modify. 31 On the File menu. click . 30 On the View toolbar. you create new levels. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. click Save.

Defining New Levels In this exercise. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. select Make Plan View. 2 Select grid 1. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Structural_tutorial. 5 On the Options Bar. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. click Level. you create several new levels. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. Click to add Level 3. double-click Building Elevation. You need at least 3 meters of space. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. Defining New Levels | 939 . Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2.

Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. click . you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. This project file is required. Structural_tutorial. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. These levels that are required in the next exercise.In the Project Browser. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . you created three new levels. In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. in its current state. “Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940. Each level is 3000 mm high. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. 8 On the File menu. click Save. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level.

“Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and select Levels 4 and 5. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. Make sure the entire building model is included. select Level 3. 8 On the File menu. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. In the next lesson. This project file is required. in its current state. click Copy to Clipboard. under Elevations. 5 In the Select Levels dialog. click OK. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . double-click Building Elevation. 7 In the Project Browser. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. 3 On the Edit menu.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. press and hold CTRL. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. In this exercise. click Save.

You can now view the new elevation. make sure Attach to Grid is selected. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. 4 On the Options Bar. click Framing Elevation.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Elevation 1-a. you create a framing elevation. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model. Structural_tutorial. and click. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . 5 Place the cursor over grid C. in the Project Browser. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. double-click Level 2.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

click Save. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . You then array the braces to the remaining levels. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You are ready to add the structural braces. in its current state. This project file is required. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. you add structural braces to the building model. 8 On the File menu. In the next exercise. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. Structural_tutorial.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. Notice the stick framing representation. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. In this exercise.

click Brace. 3 In the Type Selector. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. select the view crop box. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. and using the shape grips. Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. When adding the braces. you use point-to-point insertion. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces.4. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

Adding Structural Braces | 945 . 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4.The brace displays. The second brace is displayed. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5.

12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. click Array. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. Select Constrain. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. 10 On the Edit menu. Select 2nd for Move to. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Modify. click Tag All Not Tagged. specify the following: Click .Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. Enter 4 for Number. 9 Select both braces on Level 4.

In this exercise. click . select Structural Framing Tags. Adding Structural Braces | 947 .15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 16 On the View toolbar. 17 On the File menu. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. click Save. and click OK.

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

Using Worksharing. A workset is a collection of building elements. they cannot make changes to it. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. 949 . Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. called Worksharing. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. doors. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. floors. and so on. All other team members can view this workset. such as walls. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. however. In this tutorial. You can enable Worksharing for any project. stairs.

Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. Elements specific to a view. go to the Worksets dialog. When you are working on a shared project. you can select which worksets are open or closed. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. In the lessons and exercises that follow. In the next exercise. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. use Element Borrowing. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you specify an active workset. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. After learning the fundamentals. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. To make a workset editable. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. The first time you activate worksets within a project. and click Editable. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. such as annotations and dimensions. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. select the desired workset. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. When setting up Worksharing. you must first enable Worksharing. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. After the project is shared. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application.

you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Instead. designers work in teams. not including the Project Standards.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Team member roles Typically. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. When you create a new workset. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. You should have at least one workset for each person. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. Shared Levels and Grids. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Regardless of the default setting. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. In a multi-story structure. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. As new members create worksets for their own use. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. In most projects. each team member has control over a portion of the design. for a typical project. When creating the new worksets. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. On this tab. such as a tenant interior. and View worksets. with each assigned a specific functional task. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Experience has shown that. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project.

” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. When you save to the central file. For example. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. After saving to the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. proceeds as usual. within the local file. When you save to the central file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. When you save locally (to your local file). On the Options Bar. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. however. you can select which workset is active. When finished or at regular intervals. This is called “Selective Open. you make that workset editable by you. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . your changes propagate to the entire team. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. Therefore. Generally. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. if a workset named Interior was created. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. your changes are saved. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. the file is saved as the central file. you should then save to your local file. However. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. This makes them available to other team members. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. As you work. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members.

click Training Files. you should check out the Materials workset. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. In the next exercise. reload the latest changes from the central file. you work no differently then you would in the office. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. make any required worksets editable. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 . You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. In this situation. save to the central file. if you know who checked out the required workset. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. To do this. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. and then save the local file. and open Common\c_Worksets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. In this instance. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. for instance. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. Alternatively. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture.rvt. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. and make that workset editable. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. When working remotely. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. using VPN.

It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. For example. Therefore. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. and notice all are editable by you. Project Standards. imagine four users including yourself. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. ■ 6 Under Show. Your username displays as the present owner. under Show. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. 4 In the Worksets dialog. The Worksets dialog is displayed. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. another is assigned the interior layout. click Worksets.Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. When you enable worksharing. In this case. In this simple training project. and Views. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. For training purposes. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. clear Families. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. Only User-Created worksets should display. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets.

select any of the exterior walls of the building model.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. including the interior doors. When you initially activate Worksharing. type the name Exterior Shell. 22 On the Options Bar. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. and click OK. and walls. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 13 Click Rename. clear Visible by default in all views. 21 Select one of the interior walls. 17 In the drawing area. and click OK. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. click . 9 Click OK. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. it is better to make them visible by default. however. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. you can rename the default workset. expand Floor Plans. stairs. under Identity Data. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. 10 Click New. click New. select Workset1. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. 12 In the Worksets dialog. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . currently named Workset1. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. You do. 18 On the Options Bar. select Interior Layout for Workset. click . 15 In the Worksets dialog. 20 Click OK. 24 Select all of the interior elements. Because the interior walls appear in many views. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. expand Views (all). and double-click Level 1. In this training file. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. 14 In the Rename dialog. under Identity Data. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout.

click Visibility/Graphics. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click the Worksets tab. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click . click Visibility/Graphics. select Interior Layout for Workset. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. under Identity Data. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 27 On the View menu. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . click the Worksets tab. 30 Click OK. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. and click OK. 31 On the View menu. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. If any interior elements remain.

Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. click Non Editable. 3 Click Open. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 40 Click Save. select all of the interior elements of the building model. make sure you remember the location of this central file. select the central file and. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. make modifications to the building model. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. check out worksets. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. click Close. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. click Worksets. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click Open. double-click Level 2. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. under Identity Data. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to.33 Select Interior Layout. 34 In the Project Browser. you create your local file. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 43 On the right side of the dialog. under Floor Plans. 44 Click OK. Now that you have created the central file. and click OK. 2 In the Open dialog. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. and click OK. click Save As. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. 39 In the Save As dialog. 42 In the Worksets dialog. In this exercise. 35 In the drawing area. In addition. click . 45 On the File menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. this can